Home

Ford 2010 Explorer Automobile User Manual

1. Console mount TE Visor mount Cap 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming section for Canadian residents 135 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in th
2. 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up toward the vehicle 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Turn the lug wrench clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the best of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs if possible The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try to push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 5 If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire lock and key be sure to install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key and jack handle 6 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months per scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
3. 2 Turn ignition to the on position 3 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to scroll through the information menu until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU 4 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK Do not hold the stem down at this point as you do not want to enter the system check Instead quickly release the stem and repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup menu until the message center displays COMPASS ZONE XX 5 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for approximately two seconds to enter the compass zone adjustment mode 6 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem until the desired zone number appears 7 Release the SELECT RESET stem and allow the setup timer to expire to exit the procedure Compass calibration adjustment Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Start the vehicle 26 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 2 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to scroll through the information menu until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU 3 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem until the message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK Do not h
4. Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW STOP VEHICLE if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter 38 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Quick start How to get going WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Listening to the radio 1 If the audio system is off press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AM FM repeatedly to A choose between AM FM1 FM2 frequency bands 3 Press A IV to manually go up down the frequency band EC
5. The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press front to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion 4 1 Press rear to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion 4 Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down 171 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control to recline the _ E seatback forward or rearward AN Using the power lumbar support if equipped The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press one side of the control to adjust firmness Press the other side of the control to adjust softness 7 N 7 N Memory seats and adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat and adjustable pedals to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the lower center portion of the instrument panel 1 2 e To program position 1 move the driver seat and pedals if equipped to the desired position using the associated controls Press the SET control The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate While the light is illuminated press control 1 e To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using control 2 172 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints A position can be
6. WARNING The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water WARNING The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES 95 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your finger
7. 2 Press the power door unlock control three times A 3 Turn the ignition from the on to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp 6 Press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all doors the liftgate and liftgate window 3 Enter 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 twice 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Message center procedure For information on activating deactivating the autounlock feature using the vehicle s message center Gif equipped refer to Message center information in the Instrument cluster chapter 153 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Power door lock unlock inhibit feature if equipped If the key is not in the ignition all doors are closed and the vehicle has been locked using the remote entry transmitter
8. Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 306 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH UE The fuel pump shut off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt After a collision if the engine cranks but does not start the fuel pump shut off switch may have been activated The fuel pump shut off switch is located in the passenger s foot well by the kick panel ES ION Ext j UU Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut off switch 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no fuel leak is apparent reset the fuel pump shut off switch by pressing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition to the on position Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the off position 5 Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system 307 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses a
9. 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 326 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 327 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to the ground stud located toward the front of the vehicle forward of the battery on the radiator support Keep the negative cable away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delive
10. Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance 6 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package NOTICE TO OWNERS WITH 20 INCH WHEELS AND TIRES When equipped with 20 inch wheels and tires the vehicle is designed for on road use only and not off road use Note When first driving the vehicle after it has been parked for a period of time you may experience a temporary ride disturbance This is a characteristic of the tires and should be no reason for concern The condition should correct itself within 5 15 miles 8 25 km of driving If the disturbance persists have the tires serviced by an authorized dealer Correct tire pressure is important to payload and proper ride and handling attributes Check your vehicle s Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label for the proper tire pressure levels DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor
11. HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 139 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Car2U Home Automation System if equipped The Car2U Home Automation System is a universal transmitter located in the driver s visor that includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home The Car2U system s garage door opener function replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the interior of your vehicle After being programmed for garage doors the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems WARNING Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in
12. The driver seat may move rearward if the easy entry exit feature is activated Steps 2 through 6 must be performed within a 20 second period The easy entry exit feature will be deactivated Repeating the above process will also reactivate the easy entry exit feature Heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly 174 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The heated seat control is located in the lower center of the instrument panel To operate the heated seats e Push control to activate NX e Push again to deac
13. Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask you dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodgin
14. When fail safe cooling mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait approximately 15 minutes for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low Look for coolant leakage in the engine compartment and under the vehicle WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spra
15. j0 extended running board and the EX vehicle A moving running board WOE D may cause injury 1 Clean the filler plug 2 Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level 3 Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter 381 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT DRIVESHAFT AND SLIP YOKE WARNING Turn off the power running boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings periodic lubrication will be necessary Note Your vehicle s driveshaft is balanced If undercoating the vehicle protect the driveshaft universal joints and axle and transmission flanges to prevent overspray of any undercoating material If your vehicle has four wheel drive your vehicle has two driveshafts one connected to the rear axle and one connected to the front axle AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element Whe
16. occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensor e Restraints Control Module RCM e Restraint system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions 184 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean
17. 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt 7 Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the windshield 352 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide ow
18. 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets Blank display Select this function from the info menu to turn the upper two lines of the message center display off System check and vehicle feature customization Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through the following features PRESS RESET TO BEGIN SYSTEM CHECK When this message appears press the RESET button and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present 1 OIL LIFE 2 CHARGING SYSTEM 3 WASHER FLUID 32 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 4 DOOR AJAR 5 EXTERIOR LAMP 6 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 7 PARK BRAKE 8 FUEL LEVEL AND DISTANCE TO EMPTY AWD AUTO LOCKED if equipped This feature disables enables the AWD feature Press the RESET button to select the AUTO or LOCKED mode Note When the AWD system is in the locked mode the 4X4 indicator will be illuminated UNITS Displays the current units in English or Metric Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric LANGUAGE ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH JAPANESE ARABIC Note When entering the SETUP MENU and a non English language has been selected PRESS RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to change back to English Allows you to cho
19. Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 112 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire li
20. Press repeatedly to cycle through DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD OFF Press the power button to turn the system off The indicator light will aN turn off indicating the system is off meo Note The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers and can be adjusted by the radio volume control To play a CD in the DVD system The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Insert a CD into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin to play If there is already a CD in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and CD AUDIO DISC mx 2 00 54 the CD Audio Disc screen will OD IAE display From this screen you can Sp TRACK also select from COMPRESSION MIGE TRACK4 SHUFFLE and SCAN features U TRACKS 68 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Note navigation based radio am systems only When a disc is inserted the FES switches to dual play mode rear speakers turn off and headphones turn on To switch back to all four speakers on press the headphone button To play an MP3 disc in the
21. Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and 48 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active
22. To disable enable the reverse sensing system feature with the vehicle in P Park select this function from the setup menu or put the vehicle in R Reverse 24 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn park aid on or off 3 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu TRAILER SWAY This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn trailer sway on or off 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for more than two seconds Oil life is set to 100 and OIL LIFE SET TO 100 is displayed Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months to another value proceed to Step 3 2 Once OIL LIFE SET TO 100 is displayed release press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for more than two seconds to change the oil life start value Each release press and hold will reduce the value by 10 3 After setting the oil life start value press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu i
23. WARNING Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening The moon roof is equipped with an automatic one touch express opening and closing feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time 132 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To open the moon roof Press and release the SLIDE control the moon roof will open automatically Press the switch again to stop the moon roof To close the moon roof Pull and release the SLIDE control the moon roof will close automatically Press SS the switch again to stop the moon roof Bounce back When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the moon roof is closing the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a prescribed position Bounce back override To override bounce back function pull and hold the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce back event The closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for the first three closing cycles with bounce back active For example Bounce back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon roof or seals To
24. control features if equipped Press and hold VOICE briefly until the voice icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press VOICE to complete a voice command For further information on the Navigation system refer to the Navigation System supplement SYNC system hands free control feature if equipped Press VOICE briefly until the voice lt icon appears on the display to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold VOICE to exit voice command 131 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to end call or exit phone mode Press dd P to scroll through various menus and selections Press OK to confirm your selection For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press VOICE briefly until the voice I icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to exit phone mode or end call For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED The moon roof control is located on the overhead console
25. equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 54 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with the SYNC please refer to the SYNC supplement for further information 5 SEEK In radio and CD MP3 mode press to access the previous seex SERA lt q or next 44 strong station 7 or track In satellite radio mode if equipped press A SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK SEEK gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press d SEEK SEEK B gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press A SEEK Pe to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 gt IL Play Pause This mO control is operational in CD and DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playi
26. exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems DVD player controls epre o S C Co 1 Headphone control A B While in Dual Play mode press to select either the A or B headphone source Then press MEDIA to select the desired playing media for that headset When a headphone channel has been selected A or B selections will affect the source on that channel only Note Headphone A can access any possible media AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Headphone B can only access DVD and DVD AUX For further information refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 2 A Stop Eject Press Cu once to stop and press a second time to eject a disc from the DVD system 3 F A Reverse Press and release for the previous chapter or track Press and hold to reverse search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 73 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 gt Fast forward Press and gt release for the next chapter or track Press and hold to forward search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 5 I1 Play Pause Press a Play to select DVD mode and to turn the DVD system on if it is off If a disc is present it will resume or begin to play Press Pause while playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD 6 On Of
27. has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products 124 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors E3 WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion The ignition must be in the accessory or on position to adjust the power side view mirrors To adjust your mirrors A y 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash Heated outside mirrors Li if equip
28. keypad if equipped or the power door unlock control on the door panel while a front door is open then subsequently closed the power door unlock control on the door panel will become disabled 20 seconds after the lock event occurred Your vehicle comes with this feature enabled but there are two methods to disable it e Through your authorized dealer or e Performing the following power door lock control procedure Before following the activation or deactivation procedures make sure that the anti theft system is not armed ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate window are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait 30 seconds Note All doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the configuration process 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 Press the power door lock control on the door panel two times within five seconds The horn will chirp once if trim switch inhibit was deactivated or twice one short and one
29. on the thumbwheels to secure load To adjust cross bar position if equipped 1 Loosen the thumbwheel at both ends of the cross bar If the thumbwheel is too tight to release by hand a small screwdriver or similar device can be used to release the torque by inserting the shaft into the tie down loop and twisting the thumbwheel counterclockwise Both cross bars are adjustable 2 Slide the cross bar to the desired location 3 Firmly retighten the thumbwheel at both ends of the cross bar Be sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time load is added or removed from the roof rack and periodically while traveling Always ensure that the load is secure before traveling Note When the cross bars are not in use they can either be removed or adjusted so that the rear crossbar is fully rearward and the front crossbar is 10 inches from the front end cap to decrease wind noise Ford Motor Company recommends loading the roof rack only when equipped with optional crossbars to avoid unintended damage to the roof panel 148 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of grav
30. on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door 238 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you
31. pa 10 09 moTa4 quese SUINI YIM quepooy oulsuy ploy Umud Ie1910JO queTeamnbo 10 sUIeN Ld PIOA 67D syrenb J GT IZET syrenb 6ST IZED syrenb E S ISTI syenb 7 2T soned yeoT doys w s s SUON q01 Uu09 zeuro AreTT Ene YM oulsuo TYP quejooo sUIsUy qo1yU09 oyeul AreTT Ene jnoyyM sursue 9P quejooo sUIsUy q01 Uu09 ze uno rexne UM oulsuo TO P quejooo susug q01 Uu09 yeu AreTTEXNe OYA usu TO P quejooo sugu 386 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing 2010 Explorer exp USA fus Maintenance and Specifications JITEN UOTIVOTLAID IdV UM V 0S602N SSM Cepeuen ZISAT OZMS OX08 epeueD ZIdST OZMS OX0 SN SAb 0ZMS OXe SN dS 0ZMS OXe Ie Uorren IdV UM V 6Z60ZNW SSM epeued ZISHT OSMSG OX0e epeue ZI dST 0O8MS OX0e SN SAO 0EMS OXe Sn dS 0EMS OXe uoTneolyiveds pio Joquny Hed PIOA epeurd TO IOJOW IJOYWAS OSM AVS LIDIO o epeuro TO I0 0W umnpuoIq Jadng 07M9 HYS JJLIDIOJON SM TO 1090 MPYJU S MA OS MG HYS JLIDIOJON SM TO 1090 pu rg oeyyss wnd 07 MS AVS LIDIO o zCEpLu LD TO 1090W OTJOYIJUAS OYS MG AVS LIDIO epeueg TIO 10 0W UmntwId Jadng 0E M9 AVS LIDIO SM TO 100 M YJU S MA OS MG AVS YLIDIOJONW SN TO 1090 pu jg 0N yJu s wUMTUetd 0E M9 AVS LIDIO Ju jeamb 10 JWEN Ped PIOA oursue T9 P lo oulsuy eurlsus TO P lo oulsuy 387 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing 2010
32. press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 49 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 Ne mode If a CD MP3 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 17 amp CD eject Press to eject a CD 18 CD slot Insert a CD label side up in the CD slot Premium AM FM in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped ai ao i Ne a 2 AM a yy 3 FM AUX 14 VOL PUSH TEXT lt SEEK SCAN SEEK i FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE gt Il OK WARNING Driving while di
33. simultaneously press all three Car2U system buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into programming mode The indicator lights will blink slowly Within 2 5 minutes enter your corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled 4 After inputting switch settings simultaneously press and release all three Car2U system buttons The indicator lights will turn on 5 Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the garage door O O O Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves During this time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Do not release the button until you see the garage door move Most garage doors open quickly You may need to hold the button from 5 55 seconds before observing movement of the garage door 6 The indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete If your garage door opener does not operate following these steps repeat Steps 2 through 6 Otherwise call the toll free Car2U help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is respond
34. spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circular motion 97 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the FES will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system without interface to the radio While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A and B will be connected to FES DISC NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Ref
35. started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition 162 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located
36. the right most button to another garage door opener 142 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it is necessary to erase the current settings using the Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons procedure and then programming all of the devices being used Fixed code programming Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter 1 To program units with fixed code DIP switches you will need the garage door hand held transmitter paper and a pen or pencil 2 Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches Use the figure below When a switch is in the up on or position circle L When a switch is in the middle neutral or 0 position circle M When a switch is in the down off or position circle R 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MOUAUAWOE Switch position 10 ia A PEEP Ep pte pT Down ofer e e e e e e a e L left M middle R right 143 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 To input these positions into the Car2U system
37. this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box is marked on the computer module and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create your own 5 digit personal entry code In the event the wallet card is lost the factory set code cannot be reprogrammed When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation ERRE Programming a personal entry code Up to three personal entry codes may be programmed to the vehicle To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 Press 1 e 2 3 e 4 or 5 e 6 to indicate which of the three personal entry code positions you wish to use 5 The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal key code has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code 161 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e If you program a code to a position that already contains a set code the previously set code will be erased Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within fi
38. 337 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Cltems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can b
39. 342 dw09 aow usea oL idSJ P404 YUM PUIN 40 3983d BUINUAY Jag 397 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing 2010 Explorer exp USA fus Index A refill capacities cee 385 Accessory delay cccccccccseees 124 B pian Trae ct i me Battery ocara inann 359 Air cleaner filter sessa 382 384 acid treating emergencies 3859 Air conditioning 101 jumping a disabled battery 325 Oe maintenance free 359 Airbag supplemental ere sa replacement specifications 384 SVSLEMN vsciscnsvesceseeseseess SErVICINE sess heroe 359 and child safety seats 201 Belt Minder 194 e a cca 199 208 210 elt Minder sassen disposal syria a iernii 213 Booster seats 229 driver airbag 201 208 211 Brake suenie 275 indicator light 00 0 208 213 ANtI OCK p ecsorodriei redin 276 operation 00 201 208 211 anti lock brake system ABS passenger airbag 201 208 211 warning light oesie 276 side airbag os eessessieeeseeseeee 208 fluid checking and adding 380 All Wheel Drive AWD fluid refill capacities 385 driving off road ETE 295 fluid specifications 385 lubricant specifications 385 Ambulance packages 6 PATKING saci dsiseresseeiasseesascdianieds 277 Antifreeze shift interlock wo eee 285 see Engine coolant 361 Anti lock brake system c z one POP apaa nae ee a Calculat
40. Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel and e longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location using GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors To access this information special equipment m
41. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide o
42. If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WARNING Turn off the running boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand in the hinge assemblies A moving running board may cause injury 320 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite of the flat tire using the wheel chock provided with your QO Ie vehicle a Z 2 Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove the beauty cap by twisting the tip under the cap On 5 passenger vehicles the carpeted floor lid can be used as a kneeling pad 3 Loosen each wheel lug nut by half a turn but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 4 Assemble the jack handle extension on the lug nut wrench by sliding the square end of the jack handle through the plastic grommet on the lug nut wrench and into the square hole on the other side Men a a 321 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 5 Position
43. OL Oey 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 249 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantl
44. Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel A This a information will display on the DVD system screen Press the Headphone Control button B to change the audio source for Channel B Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B This information will display on the DVD system screen Channel B can listen to either the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs DVD AUX Dual Play non navigation based radio systems Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and rear seat controls turned ON the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to the radio CD MP3 DVD or DVD AUX media sources over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system they may listen to another over the headphones DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen to the same audio source SHARED MODE will appear on the radio Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel Press the A t headphone speaker am button on the DVD player or navigation radio touch screen The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the A or B headphone
45. Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide l sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint N Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 167 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position A l 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and the unlock remove button then pull A up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks Va Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even w
46. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event SOS Post Crash Alert System The SOS Post Crash Alert automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The SOS Post Crash Alert can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 213 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Alwa
47. accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Aluminum fuel filler door Bug shields Deflectors Running boards Interior style Ambient lighting for footwells and cupholders Electrochromic compass temperature interior mirrors Floor mats Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s package Cargo organization and management Neutral tow kit Trailer hitch drawbars and towing accessories 393 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Accessories Peace of mind Keyless entry keypad Remote start Vehicle security systems Locking gas plug for capless fuel system Wheel locks For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Co
48. an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Small Children who have outgrown or no Use a children longer properly fit in a child safety belt positioning seat generally children who are less booster seat than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 lbs 86 kg and upward to 100 lbs 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Larger Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle children longer properly fit in a belt positioning safety belt having booster seat generally children who the lap belt snug are at least 4 feet 9 inches and low across 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib the hips shoulder 36 kg or 100 lb 45 kg if belt centered recommended by child restraint across the manufacturer shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are saf
49. are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visual
50. as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e 5 passenger vehicle For the center seat use either of a b the two tether anchors cargo secre tie downs in the scuff plate along ee the back edge of the floor a L e 6 passenger vehicle e 7 passenger vehicle oo b f Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system you can attach the top tether strap 226 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors 1 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts For vehicles with adjustable h
51. at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the last loaded disc will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this chapter for further information 3 In CD MP3 mode you can access the following features Press lt Q SEEK SEEK to access the previous next tracks seex se Press and hold REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track EA Press and hold FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track Ea While in folder mode press lt a FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 41 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems While in folder mode press FOLDER p to access the next folder on MP3 discs if available Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle EA mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder Press B gt I1_ play pause
52. be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus 277 Driving Pull the release lever to release the brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy Ci ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose con
53. cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s saf
54. dealer as soon as possible Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle Tips e A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle e Only use SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible e If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition 164 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove
55. decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below 205 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Pass Airbag Off 7 Small i e three ring Unlit Disabled binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Lit Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console if equipped Objects hanging off the seat back Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket Gf equipped Objects placed on the occupant s lap Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat Check to see if the clear objects by pass seat warning is displaying in the message center Refer to Message center in
56. during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET button press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 31 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster FUEL ECONOMY MPG L ikm This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset FUEL USED XX X GAL L 4 This displays the fuel used since last reset The information displayed will be in gallons or liters depending on English Metric mode state DRIVE TIME Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer
57. engine does not start on the first try turn the key to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air 273 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures r
58. filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets Press OK to close and return to the main menu RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc 45 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt Q SEEK P to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type Press OK to close and return to the main menu To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A vy to find the desired type then press and release lt SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYT etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A Vv to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A V to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu Press OK to close an
59. fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage 371 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems try a different brand of unleaded gasoline If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on po
60. half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
61. headlamp control towards the instrument panel to deactivate the fog lamps Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped To activate DRL e the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control is in the O or p position e the transmission is not in P Park WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Light DRL System does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate 107 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights Flash to pass Pull the lever toward you to activate Release the lever to deactivate UI OF PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel when exterior lights are on 3 e Rotate the thumbwheel from left to right to brighten the 1 instrument panel e Rotate the thumbwheel from right to left to dim the instrument panel e Rotate fully to the right past detent to turn on interior lamps e Rotate to the left position past detent to turn off the interior lamps and to disable the illuminated entry feature When the control is in the far left position it acts as a dome
62. ice AWD and 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD or a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations avoid locking of the wheels Use a squeeze technique push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel If you lock the wheels release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS apply the brake steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system WARNING If you are driving
63. in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter 29 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center allows you to configure personalize certain vehicle options to suit your needs The message center is also capable NU WF of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential oon vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster f C RPA ad E h E XXX N SERVICE Nu 1713F Ni 13 F scan i oom o o fi h U a E SETUP PRESS RESET C4 B E z TO BEGIN on a Mt SYSTEM CHECK at a dae 0 0 i Your display can show up to six reconfigurable telltales at one time Whatever is displayed in the top left corner has the highest priority Info Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features INFO SETUP RESET TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the di
64. in use no infrared signal is received the wireless headphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use 81 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Wired headphones WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road You may purchase wired headphones for your FES Family Entertainment System Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located on the left and right sides of the system Channel A is located on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side These headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD system The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left side of the FES and is labeled A A Hea
65. injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb 1400 750 5 x 150 650 lb In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four fr
66. is complete If any of the above shift conditions are not met the shift will not occur and the message center will display the appropriate information ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED For the lubricant specification and refill capacity of the AWD transfer case refer to Maintenance and Specifications chapter WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a spare tire of a different size than the road tires should never be used Such a tire could make the vehicle difficult to control as well as result in damage to driveline components WARNING Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles 295 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Normal operation 4 0L engine vehicles only The AWD system is always active and requires no driver input It is capable of handling all road conditions including street and highway driving as well as off road conditions such as deep snow ice or shallow sand Normal operation 4 6L engine vehicles only During normal operation the AWD system is in AWD AUTO mode AWD LOCKED will illuminate in the message center for four seconds when you first start your vehicle The 4X4 indicator in the instrument cluster will briefly illuminate when
67. lamp defeat override Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full dome on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the assembly plant If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps have them checked by a qualified service technician Headlamp aim adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted Your vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments 108 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights To adjust the headlamps 1 Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet 7 6 meters away from a vertical plain surface 8 Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern e 1 8 feet 2 4 m e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 8 25 feet 7 6 m e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 The center of the headlamp has a 3 0 mm circle on the lens Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground 2 and mark an 8 foot 2 4 m long horizontal line on the plain surface 1 at this height masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam hea
68. main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Solid Warning Light Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to under inflated ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn OFF Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 253 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare
69. normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle e Standard instrument cluster Nu 1F aami e Optional instrument cluster Refer to Message center in this chapter on how to switch the display from English to Metric Ni EF 0 0 19 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys e Standard instrument cluster Press the SELECT RESET control TRIP A once to switch from the odometer to XXXX mi seLecT the TRIP A feature Press the a control again to select the TRIP B feature To reset the trip press and hold the control again until the trip reading is 0 0 miles e Optional instrument cluster see TRIP A B under Message center in TRIP A this chapter XXX mi Note Outside air temperature will NI JFF only be displayed in the instrument cluster message center on vehicles i 0 0 mi l with manual climate control Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
70. number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 335 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUT
71. of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram AEA YVAANAAA see eae Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires 244 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers t
72. of battery powered infrared wireless headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones following 79 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To install the batteries remove the screw at the bottom of the cover Then lightly press down on top and slide the cover off When replacing the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing 80 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To operate the headphones e Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment Select the desired audio source Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approximately one minute of not being
73. or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant 363 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a transl
74. own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 6 gt IL Play Pause This control is operational in CD and E DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD or DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display OK Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK For further information refer to the SYNC supplement If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES o refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 7 SHUFFLE Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER gt In folder mode press FOLDER e to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press lt FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind
75. per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel door is located 20 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center allows you to configure personalize certain Nid qe vehicle options to suit your needs The message center is also capable 0 0 fil of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Selectable features information menu Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to scroll and Mu WF reset the following functions Select or reset the function by holding the o 0 ida SELECT RESET stem for more than two seconds TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press the SELECT RESET stem once to switch from the odometer to the TRIP A feature Press the control again to se
76. powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 332 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service
77. provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature When the Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 194 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Belt Minder feature uses two different warning chimes During the first minute of activation the warning chime will sound once every second Th
78. sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 341 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal W
79. the jack according to the illustrated guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch 25 mm off the ground Note Do not use the running boards front and rear hinge assemblies running board motors or the running board underbody mounts to lift the vehicle with the jack cal jo ok x OA KC r T S KA TCA A AGS A i WARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire e Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point 6 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 7 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts cone side in until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 8 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 322 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 9 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire
80. the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds Pressing the SELECT RESET stem cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows OIL LIFE CHARGING SYSTEM WASHER FLUID DOOR AJAR EXTERIOR LAMP BRAKE FLUID LEVEL PARK BRAKE MILES TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW will only display if 50 miles 80 km or less to empty AWD AUTO LOCKED 4 6L engine vehicles only This displays the AWD locked function 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem within four seconds to turn the AWD system to the auto locked mode 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu Note When the AWD system is in the LOCKED mode the 4X4 indicator will be illuminated UNITS Displays the current units English or Metric 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to change from English to Metric CONANT wWDY He 23 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH JAPANESE Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish Frenc
81. the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Driving with a 5 speed automatic transmission if equipped This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy This Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission C and prevents the rear wheels from turning gt Vv To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Press the brake pedal Q e Press the gearshift release button on the front of the lever and move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set th
82. to re activate or resolve subscription issues FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 66 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs CDs MP3s and is compatible with CD R W CD R and certain CD ROM media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information Note Any notations or restrictions on individual DVD system controls are applicable to the overhead controls as well as to duplicate controls found on the remote control Quick start Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system two sets of wireless infrared IR headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control Note To disable the DVD rear seat controls e If your vehicle is equipped with t
83. to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front 185 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front passenger airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from frontal
84. up into the system 90 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus 4 Use the DVD bezel controls to Press to play or pause a DVD Press to stop or eject a DVD Press and release to go to the previous chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse search Press and release to go to the next chapter Press and hold for a fast forward search Press when not in menu mode to adjust brightness or when in menu mode to navigate through the menu selections Press to adjust volume levels Slow play 1 With a DVD playing press pause 2 Press and hold the reverse or advance button to enter into slow play mode Once in slow play mode Entertainment Systems EBAG ES VOLUME press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle through 1 4 and 1 2 These will display on the status bar on top of the screen as the screens cycle through at this rate Frame by frame 1 With a DVD playing press pause 2010 Explorer exp 91 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Press the right cursor button The DVD will advance one frame Each press of the right cursor button will advance the DVD video by one frame Headphone auxiliary jacks There are wired headphones not included and auxiliary jacks on the left and right side of your DVD system They can be used to plug in wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices s
85. vent the moon roof Press and release the TILT control the moon roof will move to the vent position automatically from any moon roof position Press the switch again to stop the moon roof Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moon roof The moon roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle Accessory delay With accessory delay the window switches audio system and moon roof may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until either front door is opened UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s universal garage door opener will vary according to your option package Before programing make sure your transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure 133 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls HomeLink Car2U Home Automation System HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the overhead console or on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING Wh
86. when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage when the engine is running If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible If the warning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating at normal speeds contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the braking system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the reverse sensing system park aid is disabled LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is mal
87. with navigation through the disc files 62 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various P 4 mp3 files may be present files with L A mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored r fi mps 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps of tasks on your work computer LJI mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system PT L1 mp3 7 F doc j El ppt L xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equ
88. without accessory delay being active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security override To override a bounce back condition within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position pull and hold the switch up and the window will travel up with no bounce back or pinch protection If the switch is released before the window is fully closed the window will stop For example this can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals 123 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the audio system power windows and moon roof if equipped operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the on to the off position or until either front door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror which
89. you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon C indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon K indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon C indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at
90. 0 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception e Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception 60 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached ef 4 P 61 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems CDs with homemade paper adhes
91. 0 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster 228 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit Wh
92. 2 warning light and Preparing to drive your CHIME cssiesinpstileeserateeassiassed 193 194 VENICE rana nE 284 Safety restraints LATCH R ANCHOMS scsciscesissssenesisesvvesewuase 222 Safety seats for children 218 RITI sennen 39 43 50 Safety Compliance Rear seat entertainment Certification Label 000 391 SVSUGING ac f an ie 66 Satellite Radio Information 63 Rear window defroster 105 Seats sissies 166 Recommendations for child safety seats 0 000000000 218 attaching safety restraints for easy access easyout children sed srchecinciveanelter nvsndtavciant 216 FOAL Coan eeeeeeeeeeecsseeeteeeetceeeeies 173 front Seats ccccceccecesseeeeetees 169 Relays papa smadsesienaping eee veer macne suseyace 308 heated cocccccccccccccccccccecececece 174 175 Remote entry system 155 156 memory seat seese 157 172 402 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus SecuriCode keyless entry SVS UCM aer R R 161 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSUCMM eons eina RE NE 162 Setting the clock AM FM single CD uu 45 AM FM In dash 6 CD 0 0 52 SNOWDPIOWING ssceeeeeeeeteeeeteeeees 6 SOS Post Crash Alert 213 Spark plugs specifications s s s 384 390 Special notice ambulance conversions 6 utility type vehicles 000 6 Specification chart WIDTH GANS sc ssicsisesexccucestisscencencdecs 385 Speed control ccceeeeeee
93. 325 K Keyless entry system AULOLOCK oisi 150 152 keypad cahcca essed sededeacSiaeseasveaekacs 161 locking and unlocking JOOLS eaae eE 162 programming entry code 161 KOVI e 164 positions of the ignition 270 L Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart 111 112 daytime running light 107 fog MAM PS siniese 107 2010 Explorer exp Headlamps cccccccceeseceeeees 106 interior lamps ccccceees 110 LATCH anchors ccceceeees 222 Liftgate esi versie ssscsietegelianecases 147 remote release sisnricsisinis 157 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 276 Load limits wo ececeeeeeteeeeeee 255 Loading instructions 262 Locks AULOLOCK icsscssseeerescsaeesense 150 152 CHILGPLOOL tercino inaia 155 CO OVS AAE T E 150 Lubricant specifications 385 LUS NULS aiax ty leetatintestivennceny Hse 324 Luggage rack 00 148 Lumbar support seats 170 172 M Message center 0ee 21 30 english metric button 27 36 system check button 27 36 warning messages e 27 36 MITOS oresar 124 125 automatic dimming rearview TET OR enicssdisepsesnsaystencoredanezsaveas 12 fold AWAY ereere eaire eia 125 Heated esere RENE 125 side view mirrors power 125 MOON LOOT wssisiisdiccistesveemeeenss 132 Motorcraft parts 346 367 384 N Navigation system ccceeeeeee 98 O Octa
94. 4X4 and AWD GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight GCWR Ilb kg range lb kg 0 Maximum 4 0L SOHC Class 3 55 8500 3856 0 3500 0 1588 4 6L Class II 3 55 8500 3856 0 3500 0 1588 a K iain 4 0L SOHC Class 3 73 10000 4536 0 5205 0 2361 IM IV towing 264 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 4X4 and AWD GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight Rear axle ratio Maximum Trailer weight GCWR Ib kg range lb kg 0 Maximum 4 6L Class III IV 3 55 12000 5443 0 7115 0 3227 towing Notes For high altitude operation reduce GCW by 2 per 1 000 ft 300 meters elevation For definitions of terms used in this table and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter Maximum trailer weights shown The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the GCWR When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and or on steep grades the A C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine from overheating This may result in a temporary increase of interior temperatures Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitch
95. 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 193 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature
96. A fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon C indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fu
97. BAXXXKG non maui AN 7 REAR GAWR PHBE AR OOK Bf XxxxKG WITHZAVEC T RES PNEUS PWA DATE xx xx roy XXXX XXXXXX RIMS JANTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PSI LPC xxx xx COLD A FROID xxx xx JUMELEES VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE 0000X COMPLIES 0009 300 00 33000 jumped ll INTIR TIPPS TR AMIE T SPR X XX X XXXX XXX O OOODUUODIKX XXX VXXXX00000X XX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 259 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Gew GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the h
98. C 37 A 347 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS e Use the scheduled maintenance information to track routine service e Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications e Your authorized dealer can provide parts and service PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts WARNING Turn off the power running boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly 348 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage a
99. CJ controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers General information Note DVDs are formatted by regions US and Canada systems can only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico systems can only play region 4 DVDs Systems sold in vehicles targeted for other parts of the world would have different regions If a playback problem is encountered please ensure that you are using a disc designed for your vehicle The region coding can be found stamped on the disc or on the box and can say region 1 or region 4 etc They may also be marked by a numerical symbol Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license no
100. DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Insert an MP3 disc into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and N JJ automatically begin to play If there is already a disc in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and o the MP3 Audio Disc screen will display and allow you to access the enom SY COMPRESSION SHUFFLE SCAN and FOLDER MODE features DVD MP3 FOLDER1 TRACK 00 24 Note navigation based radio am systems only When a disc is inserted the FES switches to dual play mode rear speakers turn off and headphones turn on To switch back to all four speakers on press the headphone button To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Press the power button to turn the DVD system on The indicator light next to the power button will woe illuminate 69 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 Connect an auxiliary audio video source by connecting RCA cords 1 2 3 4 not included to the RCA jacks on the left hand side of the system e Yellow 1 video input LO ae aa e White 2 left channel a
101. ED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and right front passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash When the Safety Canopy system seat mounted side airbags and or the front airbags are activated the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is properly buckled WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags seat mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy and safety belt pretensioners Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter 191 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments at the front outboard seating positions Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the b
102. Explorer exp USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CV 9TE8SNW ESM V GE OZ A eNOOddN WO S LX V L6TOGN dSM TO 06MO08 AX V c6TOGN ISM TO OVIMGLAX AT eNOOUdIN NTO O15LX A eNOoddN WO S LX uone d pIo TOQUWNN Led PLOT 17U99U00 a TOYSeA PIOSPUM UML 1YeI9I10 0 JOYseM PPOUSPUM CaMV PMY 9869 pF osvo J JSULLL IIJSUBL IFeIIIOLOW Camp pm oseo rJojsuedy IIOAIOSOL ALV A oNOOYAN uo sour IJeI10JON XVIV pue NIW ay U Mq Ty pm Sul19e s IaMog ESI oky woy umud 06 M08 TET squid 2 g eens AVS JLI ONW JUBILIGNT OXY Tey oTOUTUAS OFT MGL CWD sud gg pmy ope meoy AVS ILII070 0849 olLV AT eNOOUTIN CIP TD Hone tio eames IJeI21070 syenb T gI neuromy pmy S9999 UOTSSTUISUBI HEII0J0W onewomy Ju reamb IIV A oNOOYAN 07D syrenb 2T 388 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing 2010 Explorer exp USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRAIOJUT VOIAIOS J9OIIOD IYJ OUTULIOJOP O WOWHWUWALOSUL BOUDUAIUIWUL PayNpayoS 04 IOJOY aseurep UOISSTUSULI SNVI ABUL PINE popusuIUIODaI oY UeY 19470 pny Aue Jo sN oseurep UOTssTUIsUeTY asned Leur NT oNOQYAN SulMbe uorssnusued oewoyne ue ul pm asesn Tenp e Jo as TRAIOJUT VOIAIOS J9OIIOD IYJ OUTULIOJOP 0 WOWHWALOSUL BDUDUAIUWUL PayNpayoS 0 Iajoy aseurep uOIsstwsuet asneo Leur PINT popusUIWIODaI oY uey 19470 pin Aue Jo os aseurep uoTssTuIsURT SNLI KeW A eNOOUAW Suber uorsstuisues oFe
103. It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 256 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Example only CA
104. KPaIXX C PSLCOLD AT XXX KPaIXX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR wipe eg VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Compliance Certification Label is EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX on e TYPE XXX XXXXX by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s WA UM VOU NY ATT door EXT PNT _ XX RCXX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR IPPS R TAXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number 391 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO wi n DATE XX XX GVW
105. Locate the white plastic funnel It is attached to the underside of the spare tire cover or is included with the tire changing tools 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the Easy Fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle 373 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 8 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of thi
106. O LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form wil
107. OLE sserissiscisserissennssssres 120 121 OVETNECAD sissies 119 TOAD sssHiscissavissosaeeacdeeniestdavdencance 121 Controls POWEP SEAL nronu nia 170 steering column assises 130 Coolant checking and adding 361 refill capacities 365 385 SPeCifications eeceeeeeeeeee 385 Cruise control see Speed control 0 128 Customer Assistance 305 Ford Extended Service PAI ereiaro erer a 395 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada ccccee 337 Getting roadside assistance 305 Getting the service you NEO ESA E AA OE 333 2010 Explorer exp Index Ordering additional owner s literature woe 338 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Programi sereni Seedbicen cies 337 D Daytime running lamps see Lamps cccesseesesseeees 107 Defrost rear WINKOW cccccccesseceeesseeees 105 Dipstick automatic transmission Huld enner a tiie dees 380 engine Oll yeino ioe 354 Driveline universal joint and slip YOKE sisssisissrsescersiserrsoseesss 382 Driving under special conditions n se 291 298 302 Sand a a A 300 Snow and ice woeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 303 through water esses 301 304 Dual automatic temperature control DATC ees 101 DVD system cecceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 66 E Electronic message center 21 30 Emergencies roadside jump starting oe 325 running out of fuel 325 372 Emergency Flashers 306 Emission con
108. Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon bag airbag with an inflator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Crash sensors located on the front doors and C pillars one sensor on each pillar on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collis
109. P3 FOLDER1 TRACK7 00 24 COMP SHUFFLE SCAN e Disc type Some CD RW discs may operate inconsistently and may cause an error message to appear We recommend burning MP3 files onto CD R discs Disc finalization The disc may be left open for the purpose of adding sessions to it at a later time but be sure to close each session or the disc will not play e Bit rate The player supports bit rates from 32 320 kbps as well as variable bit rate MP3 files but lower bit rates will have a noticeable effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low fidelity music material We recommend that you encode MP3 files using a high quality encoder e PC configuration Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your computer s resources Follow the PC configuration recommendations of the encoder software vendor We recommend that you avoid running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable noise and distortion 89 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems CD MP3 and CD player care e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player if equipped e Always store discs out of direct sunlight Excessive heat may damage or warp discs Use care when handling a
110. Press A SEEK gt to search down up the chosen frequency band Geer D for the next strongest station To disengage SEEK mode press A IV prt pce Gh maa desired station press and hold a memory preset 1 6 to save the station PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six stations in each frequency band six in AM six in FM1 and six in FM2 To access your saved stations press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the station frequency will appear on the display 39 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Listening to satellite radio if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AUX repeatedly to cycle oN through auxiliary audio sources Select SAT1 SAT2 or SAT3 to listen to satellite radio 3 Press lt Q SEEK SEEK P to access the previous or next satellite Gseex 7 secxe channel You may also seek by music category For further information refer to CATEGORY listing under the MENU control on your specific audio system 4 Once you are tuned to the desired channel press and hold a memory preset 1 6 to save the channel PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return sign
111. R XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The follo vng table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAWR XXXL which transmission each code XXXXKG WTH XXXXKG WITH represents A B XXXX XX FINS AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD 4f AT XXX KPalxX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MO VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX EXT PNT _ XX RC XX DSO WB BRK TINTTR TIPPS R AXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX 00 XXXX XXXXXXX XX Five speed automatic 5R55S Six speed automatic 6R80 O 392 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective
112. RCM 211 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Safety Canopy system in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second or third row seats if equipped The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window openings The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above the first and second row seats In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy system will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the Safety Canopy system did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is w
113. RGO Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs S MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 PS1 ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60PS INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL xX FRONT yy REAR x NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs SZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE is ono essa re Paana LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI LT225 75R 165E 200 KPA 29 PSI RA DE T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus 257 Tires Wheels and Loading GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear T
114. TUP button to select PRESS RESET FOR CALIBRATION 2 Press RESET to calibrate 3 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED It will take up to five circles to complete calibration 4 The compass is now calibrated 35 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press RESET button to display HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL 2 Press and hold the RESET button for more than two seconds Oil life is set to 100 and OIL CHANGE SET TO 100 is displayed Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 Note Oil Life Start Value of 100 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months For example setting Oil Life Start Value to 60 sets the Oil Life Start Value to 3 000 miles 4 800 km and 120 days System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the di
115. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 18 Message center 21 Entertainment Systems 39 How to get going 39 AM FM stereo with CD 43 AM FM stereo with in dash six CD 50 Auxiliary input jack Line in 58 USB port 60 Satellite radio information 63 Family entertainment system 66 Navigation system 98 SYNC 98 Climate Controls 99 Manual heating and air conditioning 99 Automatic temperature control 101 Auxiliary passenger climate control 104 Rear window defroster 105 Lights 106 Headlamps 106 Turn signal control 110 Bulb replacement 111 Driver Controls 117 Windshield wiper washer control 117 Steering wheel adjustment 118 Power windows 122 Mirrors 124 Speed control 128 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Locks and Security 150 Keys 150 Locks 150 Anti theft system 156 Seating and Safety Restraints 166 Seating 166 Safety restraints 184 Airbags 199 Child restraints 214 Tires Wheels and Loading 233 Tire information 235 Tire inflation 238 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 250 Vehicle loading 255 Trailer towing 263 Recreational towing 268 Driving 270 Starting 270 Brakes 275 AdvanceTrac 278 Transmission operation 286 Reverse sensing system 291 Roadside Emergencies 305 Getting roadside assistance 305 Hazard flasher control 306 Fuel pump shut off switch 307 Fuses and relays 308 Changing tires 315 Wheel lug nut torq
116. USA fus Entertainment Systems 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion USB port if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port inside your center console This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory Gey sticks and also to charge devices if Z they support this feature For further information on this feature a refer to Accessing and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation System supplement GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 53
117. adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat e Remove the obstruction s Gf found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner s Guide WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required 207 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either o flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not AN illuminate immediately after ign
118. advance to the previous lt q or next cr DVD chapters e II Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD When the radio displays DVD MENU press PLAY on the radio memory preset 6 to play the disc Parental control for the DVD system Your Family Entertainment System FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system JJ There are three levels of control of the FES buttons The states are WOO CJ 2 FULL enabled LOCAL or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described as FULL enabled The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCAL The FES has control over the secondary source headphones only The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary speaker audio source LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject 93 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems When the DVD system is ON you F can then press fhe memory ries CJ CJ ED C CJ
119. ag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 218 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts If needed when installing some high back child restraints the head restraints of the second row seating positions can be removed Insert a thin pointed object such as a paper clip or pushpin into the hole of each head restraint guide and while lifting up remove the head restraint Store the head restraint in a secure location in the vehicle such as on the floor against the rear of the front seats To re install the head restraint line the posts up in the holes on the seat back with the head restraint strap facing
120. ailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps WARNING Never connect any trailer lighting to the vehicle s taillamp circuits because it may damage the electrical system resulting in fire Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation Additional electrical equipment may be required 266 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Driving while you tow When towing a trailer To ensure proper break in of powertrain components do not trailer tow during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle To ensure proper break in of powertrain components during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing drive no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer To eliminate excessive shifting use a lower gear This will also assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Under extreme conditions with
121. ailure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS Airbag readiness If this light fails o to illuminate when the ignition is turned to on continues to flash or IN remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder PA chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature 14 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Charging system lluminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component e Standard instrument cluster e Optional instrument cluster Engine oil pressure lluminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range Check the oil level and add oil if needed Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specification
122. airbag deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in a rear seating position The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries t
123. ake sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE 275 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopp
124. al caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface activate the hazard flashers and set the parking brake 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn engine off 3 Turn off the power running boards if equipped Refer to Running boards in the Driver Controls chapter Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 317 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations Spare tire Under the vehicle just in front of the rear bumper The spare tire winch drive nut is located at the rear center of the cargo area under a lid Jack lug nut wrench jack handle Behind the rear seat under the wheel chock carpeted floor lid in the cargo floor The tools are located in a bag attached to the jack Removing the jack and tools 1 Open liftgate and remove the carpeted floor lid 2 Turn jack screw eyelet 1 counterclockwise to release pressure 3 Rotate the locking pin 2 clockwise until loose then pull out until it stops and remove the jack and tool
125. aler 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine owl in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the upper hole on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until three clicks can be heard To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed 356 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Engine Oil Recommendations 4 0L V6 Engine Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 30 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warra
126. alia www ford com au e In Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Lil touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment
127. all vents near the side windows CW Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents 3 A C Press to turn A C on off Uses outside air to cool the vehicle Air flows primarily from the instrument panel register vents 4 Rear defroster Clears ice and fog from the rear window 5 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in the off position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats 99 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down when the vehicle interior is significantly warmer than the outside temperature drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting turn off the rear A C unit and put the vehicle s transmission into the P Park to continue to receive coo
128. amp or the center light can be turned on when the panel dimmer control is rotated fully up or when a door is y opened The rear dome lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control C Ee BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present 111 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North Amer
129. an explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 325 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level
130. ance and Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 118 km h with no full throttle starts e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e causing internal damage to the components e affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be check
131. and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle 217 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Azrb
132. and fan level of the rear compartment to quickly heat or cool the entire vehicle Front auxiliary controls 1 Temperature control Determines temperature level 2 Mode selector Press to select air flow direction to pf floor or X panel e directs air to the floor of the third row seating e Ji directs air to the overhead registers of the second and third row seating The selected mode will illuminate on the temperature control 3 Fan control Determines fan speed levels If your vehicle is equipped with the front Dual Automatic Temperature Control DATC system when the front system is turned off the fan and heat mode will operate and A C will be unavailable 104 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls FLOOR CONSOLE CLIMATE CONTROLS Controls the direction of the airflow 55 to the rear of the vehicle e directs air flow primarily through the console panel s register e directs air flow through the console floor register REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER Gp The rear defroster control is located on the instrument panel CD Press the rear defroster control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog e An indicator lamp will illuminate when the rear defroster is activated The ignition must be in the on position to operate the rear window defroster The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turne
133. ard until all of the belt is pulled out 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 221 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of move
134. arning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe E o O Q gt DFO ous Windshield HY Rear Window Defrost Demist Defrost Demist 10 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Payee WONS a Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage a Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm gt Engine Oil A Engine Coolant Temperature E yr Engine Coolant X Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid HH 8 BD LH Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter Dp pete Compartment a e Tack lt o Check Fuel Cap pS hn EE 1 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Standard instrument cluster Seas OB O SELECT RESET Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Note Some warning lights will d
135. as required for traction This mode is acceptable for all on road driving but recommended when wet pavement snow or loose gravel conditions are expected 294 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving 4X4 HIGH 4WD High Provides locked four wheel drive power to all four wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement This mode is appropriate for severe winter and off road conditions such as deep snow ice or shallow sand 4X4 LOW 4WD Low Provides locked four wheel drive power when extra power at reduced speeds is required This mode is not recommended for use on dry pavement Use this mode for off road low speed operation or when extra power is required such as climbing steep grades going through deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water Shifting between 4X4 AUTO 4WD Auto and 4X4 HIGH 4WD High e Select 4X4 AUTO 4WD Auto or 4X4 HIGH 4WD High at any forward speed Note Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping Shifting to from 4X4 LOW 4WD Low 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Place the transmission in N Neutral 3 Press the desired 4WD position e If shifting into 4x4 LOW 4WD Low wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete e If shifting out of 4X4 LOW 4WD Low wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift
136. ation only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the
137. ation on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set 271 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 3 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights 272 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start If there is difficulty in turning the key rotate the steering wheel until the key turns freely This condition may occur when e the front wheels are turned e a front wheel is against the curb 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 3 After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the
138. ay Note An MP3 formatted disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this chapter for further information 57 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc If there is only one disc present in the system press A To auto eject up to 6 CDs press and hold until the system begins ejecting a loaded disc Remove the disc and the next slot will be ejected If the ejected disc is not removed from the slot the system will reload the disc and cancel the auto eject function 19 CD slot When prompted by the SSS system insert a CD label side up Auxiliary input jack Line in WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so T
139. ay vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage 128 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Resuming a set speed Press the RES resume control and release it This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set 2 in small amounts by 1 mph or Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph or 2 km h Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached pre
140. bag from the bracket 4 Remove the chock and jack tools from the provided bag rotate the wrench socket out from the handle 318 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the spare tire Do not use an impact wrench on the winch drive nut This will damage the spare tire winch Sa ya y A gG 1 Open the cover from the carpeting on cargo floor to expose the winch drive nut 2 Insert the lug wrench on the winch drive nut The wrench will stop moving and forward resistance to turning will be felt when properly engaged 319 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Turn the wrench counterclockwise until the tire is lowered to the ground and the cable has slack When turning the wrench make sure that it does not scuff the kick plate 4 Slide the tire rearward lift one side and remove the retainer from the spare tire Changing the spare tire WARNING When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block the wheel that is diagonally opposite other end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING
141. cations Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the n
142. celeration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs 4WD Systems 4WD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On 4WD vehicles the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when neces
143. ch channel is active able to be controlled 70 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel A or B The audio source will be shown on the display You may change the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources Note Refer to Single play Dual play for more information To listen to audio over the headphones Dual play mode Non navigation based radio systems You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headphones Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired headphones for further information e Black 4 wired headphone output wired headphones not included 1 Press the headphone speaker A button on the DVD player or press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate which channel is active able to be controlled 2 Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel A or B The audio source will be shown on the display You may change the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equi
144. cial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer 343 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not fo
145. ciesedsiewayes 262 Four Wheel Drive vehicles 294 driving off road wo 296 H indicator light 294 as to drive your on Hazard flashers 0 ccccccccee 306 BAS on atria ee teres emery Headlamps cccccccesceeeeseeees 106 Puel o esseessesssssccsesstsnssseeseeseenseees 367 aiM Ng oaii 108 calculating fuel bulb specifications 112 ECONOMY csasesiskeressssss 27 32 374 daytime running lights 107 CAP oesesseesesesestesesseessenseneeneenseees 370 flash tO pass oniiir 108 CAPACILY dicentis 385 high beam o an 107 choosing the right fuel 371 turning on anq off u e 106 comparisons with EPA fuel i economy estimates 377 ae fees detergent in fuel wo 372 eating and air conditioning filler funnel o eccccccccceceeeeeeeeeee 372 SYSLEM sssr 99 101 filling your vehicle with Homelink wireless control PUES vescesincsdinssiagenscacts 367 370 374 SYSTEM aeia ieai Tonan aaan as 134 400 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Hood eses 349 How to get going oe 39 I ISILON svcesencsisesasznte ouvncaaveds 270 390 Illuminated visor mirror 118 Infant seats see Safety seats oo eee 218 Inspection maintenance I M GOSUNG ase poesiak a S 379 Instrument panel Cleaning verest i 344 CISTET vcs isievssacisccsisessndvensaveccesaress 12 J JaK urrapena E 315 318 POSITIONING oe 315 320 SUOTASE siika Errei 315 318 Jump starting your vehicle
146. cked dirt FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 346 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner Z
147. cle It cannot be opened from inside the cargo area e To open the liftgate window press the control on the remote Co entry transmitter or with the liftgate unlocked press the control button on the right side under the license plate lamp shield e To open the liftgate unlock the liftgate with the power door Qa locks the remote entry or the keyless entry pad and pull the middle lever under the license plate lamp shield To lock the liftgate and the liftgate window use the power door locks The liftgate door and window should be closed before driving If not possible damage may occur to your vehicle WARNING Always close liftgate window before opening liftgate Liftgate glass and liftgate should never be open at the same time Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle WARNING Make sure the liftgate door and or window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also reduce the risk of passengers and cargo falling out 147 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls LUGGAGE RACK Your vehicle is equipped with a roof rack for transporting items on the exterior of the vehicle The maximum recommended load to be carried on the roof rack is 100 lb 45 kg evenly distributed The cross bars if equipped can be adjusted by using the thumbwheels at each end Use the tie down loops
148. close and return to the main menu COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use V lt q SEEK SEEK to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level Press OK to close and return to the main menu SINGLE PLAY DUAL PLAY if equipped If SINGLE PLAY is ON press A v for DUAL PLAY For further information on Single Play Dual Play please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped oA LINE IN auxiliary audio mode SYNC if equipped and SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satelite radio if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC please refer to the SYNC supplement for further information 5 SEEK In radio mode press A p gt to access the Gseex previous next strong station In CD mode press Ej gt to access the previous next CD track 47 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide
149. commended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 254 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading SNOW TIRES AND CABLES WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford The use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure Using any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford may increase the risk of loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover which could result in personal injury or death The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates using snow tires or traction devices may be necessary Ford offers tire cables as a Ford approved accessory and recommends use of these or SAE class S tire cables See your authorized dealer for more information on tire cables for your vehicle Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices e Use only SAE Class S cables e Cables shoul
150. contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code Owner Guides Maintenance Schedules Recalls Ford Extended Service Plans Ford Genuine Accessories Service specials and promotions 333 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Ma
151. control buttons will illuminate The system can output two different audio sources over the headphones These are called Channel A and Channel B Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared IR wireless headphones Press the Headphone Control button A to change the audio source for Channel A 84 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel A This wow information will display on the DVD system screen Press the Headphone Control button B to change the audio source for Channel B Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B This information will display on the DVD system screen Channel B can listen to either the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs DVD AUX Operation with an aftermarket audio system Headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers e The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headph
152. d is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire 274 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater will use 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity M
153. d downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume 288 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Start the engine e Press the gearshift lever release button on the front of the lever and shift into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six 289 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving D Drive without Overdrive Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control sw
154. d on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see 196 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given Co
155. d only be used on the rear wheels e Do not use tire cables or optional traction devices on 17 18 or 20 inch wheels and tires Install cables securely verifying that the cables do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle stop and retighten them If this does not work remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage e Avoid overloading your vehicle e Remove the cables when they are no longer needed e Do not use cables on dry roads e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle Consult your authorized dealer for information on other Ford Motor Company approved methods of traction control VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading 255 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment
156. d return to the main menu BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A AA to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A A to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A v to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 17 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting 46 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems TRACK FOLDER MODE Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press lt SEEK SEEK gt to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Press A FOLDER FOLDER p to access the previous next folder if available Press OK to
157. d song press A v to select either RETURN or CANCEL a there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A vy to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode Press OK to close and return to the main menu AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A v to turn on off When the six strongest stations are
158. d to off or the accessory position To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed push the control again 105 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off p Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp control sets the headlamps to turn on and off automatically The autolamp control located on the headlamp control may be set to e turn on the lamps automatically at night turn off the lamps automatically during the daylight keep the lamps on for up to three minutes after the key is turned to off To turn the autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise to wW Note With autolamps your vehicle has a windshield wiper rainlamp feature When the headlamp control is in the autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay 106 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Fog lamp control The fog lamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in the gD amp or PS position and the high beams are not turned on Pull headlamp control towards you to turn fog lamps on The fog lamp indicator light below the 0 icon will illuminate when fog lamp is activated Push the
159. date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music channels over the internet using any computer connected to the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 64 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This pre
160. de own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the reverse sensing system may create false beeps The system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the vehicle moves in reverse at speeds less than 6 mph 10 km h The system is not effective at speeds greater than 6 mph 10 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects pit The system detects obstacles within approximately 16 feet five meters at speeds above 2 5 mph 4 km h behind the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper If vehicle speed is below 2 5 mph 4 km h the system detects obstacles within approximately 9 feet 2 6 meters behind the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the distance to the obstacle is approximately less than 18 inches 45 0 cm the tone will sound continuously If the system detects an object that is approaching the vehicle at such a rate that rapid braking is required a very high rate tone will sound If this tone is heard while reversing the driver is advised to slow down immediately until the tone either changes to a slower rate or stops While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined l
161. delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened l A IV Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Also use in menu mode to select various settings In satellite radio mode if equipped press W to tune to the next previous channel 43 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In CATEGORY MODE press A v to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to Category Mode under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to a7 access SYNC PHONE features Refer to the SYNC supplement for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press amp vy to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A y to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK w
162. dlamps The brightest part of the light should be below the horizontal line 4 If it is above the line the headlamp will need to be adjusted Be 4 Open the hood BR DNNN RESAS T SA 5 Locate the vertical adjuster for each headlamp Adjust the aim by turning the adjuster control either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up Note Use a 4 mm socket or box wrench to turn the vertical adjuster control 6 Horizontal aiming is not required for this vehicle and is non adjustable 109 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights TURN SIGNAL CONTROL amp p gt e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal 4 INTERIOR LAMPS Dome reading lamps The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is The reading portion the two outer lights can only be toggled on and off Wy VW The front map lamps are located in the overhead console if equipped Press the controls on either side of each map lamp to activate the lamps 110 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights Cargo reading lamps The dome portion of the l
163. dphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel A source The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on the right side of the FES and is labeled B Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel B source Adjust the headphone volume using the volume control on the DVD system VOLUME Operation Single play Dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to allow the rear seat passengers to listen to the radio and other media sources over the headphones This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways 82 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and the same source is playing through the front and rear speakers SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display Dual Play navigation based radio systems only Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and rear seat controls turned ON the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to the radio CD MP3 SYNC DVD or DVD AUX media sources
164. due or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e seat mounted side airbags Refer to Seat mounted side airbag system later in this chapter e Safe
165. e shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 230 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufactu
166. e air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting turn off the rear A C unit and put the vehicle s transmission into the P Park to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance e Select and A C and recirculated air Use recirculated air with A C to provide a cooler airflow e Move the temperature control to the coolest setting 103 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls To allow side window defogging and demisting while warming up the vehicle cabin 1 Select 2 Select A C 3 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel AUXILIARY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an auxiliary climate system These auxiliary controls located in the overhead console allow the front passengers to control airflow direction temperature
167. e and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s abil
168. e display press A y to find the desired type then press and release lt q SEEK SEEK P or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYT etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A y to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A V to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A vy to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A v to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A v to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu 53 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest settin
169. e engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions 270 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If the vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all snow and or ice away for the air induction inlet Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts For more inform
170. e garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 136 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming Console mount gat Visor mount During programming your hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overhea
171. e head restraint is in the down position and no objects such as books purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down 1 Lower the head restraints by e pulling on the strap N 2 Locate the recline handle situated on the side of the seat cushion by the door 3 Pull up on the handle and push the seatback forward toward the front of the vehicle 176 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To return the seat to the upright position seats not equipped with E Z entry 1 Pull up on the handle and rotate the seatback until you hear a click locking it in the upright position 2 Lift up on the head restraint until gt A it locks into its original position To return the seat to the upright position E Z entry equipped seats 1 Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Rotate the seatback until you hear a click locking it in the upright position 177 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 If the seat is to be occupied lift gt A up on the head restraint until it locks into its original position ae WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatbac
172. e is equipped with a standard Class II integrated hitch and requires only a draw bar and ball with a 19 mm 8 4 inch shank diameter An optional Class III Class IV hitch is also available Note Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury 263 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight Rear axle ratio Maximum Trailer weight GCWR Ilb kg range lb kg 0 Maximum 4 0L SOHC Class 3 55 II towing towing 4 0L SOHC Class 3 73 III IV towing 4 6L Class III IV 3 55 towing Notes For high altitude operation reduce GCW by 2 per 1 000 ft 300 meters elevation For definitions of terms used in this table and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter Maximum trailer weights shown The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the GCWR When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on steep grades the A C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine from overheating This may result in a temporary increase of interior temperatures
173. e obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 338 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Avww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 339 2010 Explorer exp Owner
174. e parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 286 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through five D Drive without Overdrive Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever e This position allows for all forward gears 1 4 except overdrive e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e O D OFF lamp is illuminated 0 D e To return to O D overdrive OFF mode press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 287 2010 Explorer
175. e rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD OPERATION IF EQUIPPED WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter Four wheel drive 4WD supplies power to all four wheels Do not use 4X4 High or 4X4 Low on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4X4 High and 4X4 Low are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces The use of 4X4 High or 4X4 Low on these surfaces may produce some noise such as occasional clunks but will not damage the drive system If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System and 4WD Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph 5 km h the 4WD system will not engage This is normal and should be no reason for concern Refer to Shifting to from 4WD Low for proper operation System indicator lights e 4X4 momentarily illuminates 4x4 when the vehicle is started Illuminates when 4X4 HIGH 4WD High is selected e 4X4 LOW momentarily 4x4 illuminates when the vehicle is started Illuminates when 4X4 LOW LOW 4WD Low is selected Using the Control Trac 4WD system 4X4 AUTO Provides electronically controlled four wheel NE T T drive with power delivered to all AUTO HIGH LOW four wheels
176. e remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second while the system is activated The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned on The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 3 mph 5 km h and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for approximately 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph 5 km h and more than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on 2010 Explorer exp The Belt Minder feature will not activate The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 195 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics base
177. each below 0 F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cor
178. ead REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved titles and press A v to cycle through the saved titles When the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A v to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A Vv to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them o
179. ead restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position When placing a child safety seat in the 2nd row center seating position of the 5 passenger vehicle the tether straps may be attached to either of the tether anchors located at the rear of the cargo area e Behind 2nd row seat e At the rear of the cargo area LOTT TS OTEN SH WWMM TY So TAT AATA TT TATA ATAT AVIV 227 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 4
180. eaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 359 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Keep batter
181. eating and Safety Restraints Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains i gt longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration 201 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery resi
182. eatures For further information please refer to the SYNC supplement If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A AA to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu 51 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song s title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save more than 20 titles the display will r
183. ecifications chapter WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Powertrain malfunction indicator lluminates when a powertrain a 4x4 or an AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible e Standard instrument cluster A e Optional instrument cluster ETR 13 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake f
184. ecked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 251 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 252 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The
185. ecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 311 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies HAHH scenes FEELS See p08 The high current fuses are coded as follows Location Rating 1 50A Battery feed 2 passenger O O ecnparimenc ise pane 2 Battery feed 3 passenger an Battery feed 1 passenger Third row seat left Anti lock brake system ABS pump Powertrain control module PCM Power seat right Third row seat right 312 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits ive 18 24 10A PCM keep alive power Canister vent Front power point Cigar lighter 4x4 module 4 6L engine only 27 20A 6R Transmission module 4 6L engine only 313 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 40 15A Fan clutch Positive crackcase ventilation PCV valve A C clutch relay Satellite radio module DVD SYNC 42 15A Redundant brake switch Electronic vapor management valve Mass air flow sensor Heated exhaust gas oxygen HEGO sensor EVR Variable cam timing VCT 1 4 6L engine only VCT2 4 6L engine only CMCV 4 6L engine only Catalyst monit
186. ed or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged 268 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate controls chapter for more information 2WD vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 4WD vehicles with electronic shift transfer case Neutral tow kit accessory An accessory is available that allows you to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle with all the wheels on the ground Contact your authorized dealer for more details Do not tow your vehicle with all wheels on the ground unless you install the neutral tow kit as vehicle damage may occur In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emerg
187. eed to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy 375 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter e Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approxi
188. eeee 128 Starting your VENICIE reeseoniiueias 270 271 273 jump Starting 0 ee 325 Steering wheel CONTEO S enana 130 HUNE arnancii 118 SYNG O r n ENR 98 T Third row power fold seat 182 Tilt steering wheel 118 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS DIVINE ns ccpcennsstnetdacssntenencedensesss 300 Roadside Emergencies 315 Tires Wheels and Loading 250 Warning Displays 12 27 36 MIE OS cas2sheealopecesiedentanzes 235 237 315 ALSNMENE scsvscscsessrccrcvasenssacsoes 244 2010 Explorer exp CAT Cec E ET 240 Changing necerte 315 320 checking the pressure 240 inflatihg ssecisun deires 238 lapel enrere ninie ar 249 replacing sa ccrsaveasssoieevedeszens 241 320 YOUCAUING ss tsscesdessovacscendceveseectns 244 safety practices 0cccee 243 sidewall information 245 snow tires and cables 255 spare tire eee 315 318 319 terminology sscrrcscrieserissss 237 re BAG OS onr pee 236 treadwear cceeeee 236 240 MO WAITS srei e O EEEE 263 recreational towing 00 268 trailer GOWING i c cssccsscseecce 263 WLECKER serceto 331 Transfer case fluid checking ssorcirssinicra 381 TPANSIMUSSION srissiurssiisisdis 286 brake shift interlock BSI 285 fluid checking and adding automatic 2 cece 380 fluid refill capacities 385 lubricant specifications 385 Turri signal siec
189. ehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The reverse sensing system sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse gear is selected WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section The park assist is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the reverse sensing system WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground 291 2010 Explorer exp Owners Gui
190. ehicle location 362 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Do not mix coolants Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating
191. ehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 59 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing
192. el the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon Cc indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required 378 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If the service engine soon C indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
193. el nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 324 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable fuel container see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system as it can be damaged You must use the included funnel in such circumstances WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank all of which could result in serious personal injury JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery c
194. elay power distribution box PDB 12 5A Rear wiper motor RUN ACC Trailer battery charge relay in PDB Radio A a rear defrost indicator PA 20A _ Horm y PST 10A Reverse lamps Trailer reverse lamps 17 10A Restraints control module Passenger occupancy 18 10A Reverse park aid Roll Stability Control RSC switch RSC 4x4 module 4x4 switch Heated seat switches Auxiliary climate control po Not sed S O 20 10A Climate control system Brake shift 310 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating Brake switch Bi color stop lamps High mount brake lamp All turn lamps Interior lamps Puddle lamps Battery saver Instrument illumination Homelink 26 15A License plate rear park lamp OOA a eee Windows The following relays are located on either side of the passenger compartment fuse panel See your authorized dealer for service of these relays Fuse Relay Location Relay 1 Delayed accessory relay Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconn
195. elt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height squeeze and hold the buttons on the side and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the buttons and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Second row comfort guide The second row outboard lap shoulder belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide This guide is attached to the quarter trim panel and is used to adjust the comfort of the shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the outboard second row seats 192 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the comfort guide 1 Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide 2 Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is centered on the occupant s shoulder WARNING Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an
196. en children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 lb 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg or upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 229 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove th
197. en programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section 134 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal
198. encies chapter AWD vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 269 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off locks the gearshift lever and allows key removal This 3 position also shuts the engine and all electrical accessories off 2 2 Accessory allows the electrical 4 accessories such as the radio to QD operate while the engine is not running 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting th
199. environment e locations where strong magnetic fields are generated 96 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not
200. er s door panel 2 Within five seconds press any control on the remote transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on the lower center portion of the instrument panel 3 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 158 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back Z D surface of the circuit board 3 Remove the old battery HONOL LO Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries ATVH Y3HLO Ni AHS LIVE FOV Id STVNIWYSL 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity A 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally af
201. er or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected 243 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment
202. er rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your owner s guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS AWD and AWD Systems if equipped A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 233 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures ca
203. er to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation system supplement if equipped 98 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 2 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This recooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle 74 Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents lt A Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate A Distributes outside air through the floor vents Note Some airflow will come out of the small vents near the side windows TF Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents Note Some airflow will come out of the sm
204. er when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 215 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH Restraint Child lower Type Weight anchors and top tether anchor Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat Forward Over 48 lb facing child 21 kg seat WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappr
205. erate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper rainlamp feature if equipped with Autolamp When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off Rear window wiper washer controls For rear wiper operation rotate the Bs rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position Select INT 1 8 10 second interval rear wiper INT 2 3 4 second interval rear wiper 117 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls O off Rear wiper and washer off For rear wash cycle rotate and hold as desired the rear wiper washer control to either GJ position From either position the control will automatically return to the INT 2 or O off position TILT STEERING COLUMN Pull the lever down and release to unlock the steering column tilt lock With the lever in the down position tilt the steering column and wheel to its desired orientation Do not push or pull the lever while tilting the wheel Lift the lever back t
206. es that clamp onto the vehicle bumper Use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue not to exceed the maximum tongue loads as stated e Class II receiver 350 Ib 159 kg e Class III IV receiver 500 Ib 227 kg weight carrying 740 lb 336 kg weight distributing Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you 265 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Class II Trailer Hitch Safety Chain Se Loops can be used as recovery ee er hooks Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Tr
207. ess PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections Press MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set up menu 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 77 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option 23 ILLUMINATION Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons Battery replacement Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player l Y Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit 78 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Headphones Wireless headphones WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road Your FES system is equipped with two sets
208. ets To set a C e e A station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and ES CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name 56 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radi
209. ety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision 345 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from pa
210. evel After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value 292 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Distance to Object up to 1 6 feet 5 meters 1 6 feet 5 meters to 3 1 feet 1 meter 3 1 feet 1 meter to 5 7 feet 1 8 meters 5 7 feet 1 8 meters to 9 feet 2 8 meters 9 feet 2 8 meters to 13 feet 4 meters 13 feet 4 meters to 19 6 feet 6 meters Speed below 2 5 mph 4 km h up to 1 4 feet 4 meters 1 4 feet 4 meters to 3 feet 9 meters 3 feet 9 meters to 4 5 feet Medium beep fs eer E 6 3 feet 1 9 meters 8 7 feet 2 6 meters 8 7 feet 2 6 meters to No sound The reverse sensing system is automatically enabled when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information The message center will indicate the system is off and will not allow the driver to switch the system on to indicate a failure of the reverse sensing system The radar sensor is located behind the rear bumper fascia Always keep the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt These elements may cause the system to operate inaccurately 293 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving If the vehicle sustains damage to th
211. exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving 3 Third Transmission operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Overdrive or Drive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear Driving with a 6 speed automatic transmission if equipped This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality The adaptive information will be stored automatically in the Powertrain Control Module PCM and Transmission Control Module TCM When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts an
212. ey cycle 197 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition switch is in the off position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the l
213. f 2 Remove the lamp assembly by pressing the small tab and rocking the lamp assembly out 3 Remove the bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out Reverse steps to reinstall bulb s 115 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing high mount brakelamp bulb 1 Remove the two screws and lamp assembly away from the vehicle 8 e 2 Remove the bulb holder from the 4 lamp assembly by pressing the snaps 3 Pull the bulb straight out of the A socket and push in the new bulb Reverse steps to reinstall bulb s 116 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not op
214. f Press to turn the DVD system On Off 7 VIDEO Press repeatedly to cycle through the following video state options which will be indicated on the bottom right hand corner of the display DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD and Off no indicator If you select the DVD AUX video source the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected When a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input and the display is in the DVD AUX video mode the display will automatically turn on 8 Infrared IR Receiver amp Transmitter System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the infrared IR wireless headphones 9 LCD screen The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched into the housing when being stored 10 Volume If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system this function is only available when in dual play mode For all other vane vehicles when in single play mode press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 74 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 11 A m Headphones Speakers Press once for Dual Play Headphone mode
215. fe and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 236 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pre
216. ff Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A A to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode Press OK to close and return to the main menu 52 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A V lt q SEEK SEEK to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets Press OK to close and return to the main menu RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of Sa format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use V lt SEEK P to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type Press OK to close and return to the main menu To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in th
217. ft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature on off SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD Press again to stop Playing MP3 discs To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Ensure that the DVD system is on 3 Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system label side up 88 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 The folder track and elapsed a time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the Artist Title Album and File Name COMP Compression rem Compression brings soft and loud a CD MP3 passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature on off SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder Press again to stop FOLDER LIST Press access folder mode and to go to the previous next folder in the MP3 disc MP3 disc quality factors Several factors can effect disc playback quality e Disc capacity Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of storage DVD M
218. ft the handle only once When the seatback releases and folds the handle should be released Any further turning of the handle while the seatback releases may damage the handle Once the seatback is folded a second lifting of the handle will detach the seat rear leg locking mechanism from the floor allowing the seat to tumble forward 2 Pull the handle up again until the seat releases from the floor 3 Push the seat upward and fold it away from the third row 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always return the seat to the fully latched position before operating the vehicle Returning the seat to the upright position Note To return the seat from its tumbled position to its upright position its rear legs should first be latched to the floor by dumping the seat down into position The interlock mechanism will not allow the release of the seatback until the seat s rear legs are fully latched to the floor Once the rear legs are fully latched the interlock will release the seatback and it can then be returned to the upright position To return the seat to a seating position 1 Push the seat down and latch to the floor with a moderate amount of effort and speed 2 Make sure the seat is latched to the floor 3 Bring the seat back to an upright position The seatback should lock into position Note If the seat back will not return to the uprigh
219. functioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 37 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 LIFTGATE GLASS AJAR Displayed when the liftgate or the liftgate glass is not completely closed TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED Displayed when your trailer starts to sway when towing Refer to Trailer sway control in the Driving chapter for more information FOR 4X4 LOW STOP VEHICLE if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped
220. g e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it 235 2010 Explorer exp
221. g allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting TRACK FOLDER MODE Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press lt SEEK SEEK p to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Press lt FOLDER FOLDER gt to access the previous next folder if available Press OK to close and return to the main menu COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use V lt q SEEK SEEK P gt to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level Press OK to close and return to the main menu ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Use A v to select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS Press OK to close and return to the main menu SINGLE PLAY DUAL PLAY if equipped If SINGLE PLAY is ON press A v for DUAL PLAY For further information on Single Play Dual Play please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped LINE IN auxiliary audio mode SYNC if equipped and SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satellite radio if
222. g meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 395 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out like brakes and shocks The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings Spark plugs except e Shock absorbers California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget 396 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan IWATA diz aLVLs ALIO ON 1dV ssayqqv LNIdd SSV41d SINVN 66 8908r IN 20 1eAoYy e208 xog O d dS P4104 0 SIU pew pue mojaq UO EWJOJUI BU
223. gh terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 296 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Basic operating principles e Do not use 4WD High or 4WD Low on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear reduce fuel economy and may damage drive components 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pave
224. h or Japanese 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to select a new language 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu AUTOLAMP This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to select the new autolamp delay time in seconds values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear and when the vehicle is in motion over 13 mph 20 km h or higher 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to to turn autolock on or off 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off 1 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to to turn autounlock on or off 2 Press the SELECT RESET stem switch for the next setup menu item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected 1
225. h mode e Fail Safe Cooling Mode The Cc Service engine soon 57 Engine oil pressure and amp Engine coolant temperature indicators will be on Along with these warning indicators the engine coolant temperature gauge will read in the Hot H area If the engine coolant reaches even hotter temperatures fail safe cooling mode limits engine power more and disables air conditioning The engine will switch to alternating cylinder operation to help cool the engine The engine will run rough in this mode If continued operation increases the engine coolant temperature to a critical range the engine will shut down Steering and braking effort will increase Once engine coolant temperature cools the engine can be restarted Engine Oil Overheat Mode The Engine coolant temperature indicator will be on The instrument cluster has no separate oil temperature indicator Along with the ake Engine coolant temperature indicator the engine coolant temperature gauge will read in the Hot H area Oil overheat can be triggered in severe driving conditions such as towing heavy loads over mountainous terrain in extreme hot temperatures As oil temperature increases engine and vehicle speed will be limited The transmission will also shift differently When the engine oil has cooled the vehicle will perform normally 366 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications
226. hapter for more information e Standard instrument cluster N e Optional instrument cluster Speed control if equipped IJuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated O D off Illuminates when the 0 D overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off OFF refer to the Driving chapter 16 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster AdvanceTrac Flashes when the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is n active Illuminates solid when the system has been disabled by the driver or as a result of a system failure refer to the Driving chapter for more information Four wheel drive low 4x4 Cif equipped Illuminates when four wheel drive low is engaged If LOW the light fails to iluminate when the ignition is turned ON or remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Four wheel drive high 4x4 Cif equipped Iluminates when four wheel drive is engaged If the light fails to iluminate when the ignition is turned on or remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Door ajar Illuminates when the ignition is in the on position and any J door liftgate or the liftgate glass is Wy open Low fuel if equipped Iluminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Low washer fluid if equi
227. hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 232 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly high
228. hat the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon C3 indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately 377 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing US
229. he Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Enables calibrated gauges to work properly When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir 361 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 4 0L V6 engine e 4 6L V8 engine e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and v
230. he Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement lt Q r 58 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the v
231. he Driver Controls chapter If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter for directions on how to move the gearshift lever out of the P Park position for proper towing On 4x2 vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without dollies and the rear wheels off the ground 331 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies On 4x4 AWD vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission
232. he compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to RESET FOR ZONE SETTING PRESS RESET FOR CALIBRATION following Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to RESET FOR ZONE SETTING PRESS RESET FOR CALIBRATION following RESET FOR ZONE SETTING 1 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 2 Start the engine 3 Press the SETUP button to select RESET FOR ZONE SETTING 4 Press the RESET button until the message center display changes to show the current zone setting XX 5 Press the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center The range of zone values are from 01 to 15 and wraps back to O1 6 Wait four seconds when correct zone is chosen PRESS RESET FOR CALIBRATION Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Press the SE
233. he following steps If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the Owner s Guide of your garage door opener or call the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 3 Return to your vehicle Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the O O O garage door You may need to hold the button from 5 20 seconds during which time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves When the button is released the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete 4 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful If your garage door does not operate repeat the previous steps in this section After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 4 substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener For example you could assign the left most button to the garage door the center button to a security device and
234. he navigation system press the MEDIA or RADIO hard button Select the Rear Zone tab on the touchscreen Press the disabled button Press the enabled button to turn the rear controls on again e If your vehicle is equipped with an audio system press the 3 and 5 preset buttons simultaneously Press again to enable the controls To play a DVD in the DVD system The DVD system can play DVD Video DVD R DVD R W discs as well as audio CDs and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints scratches and cleanliness Clean with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Insert a DVD into the system label side up to turn on the system It will load automatically 3 Press the power button on the DVD player then press Play P to begin to play the disc If a DVD is already loaded into the system press PLAY on the DVD player Note If sound can be heard but no video is present press VIDEO to select the video source DVD or aux inputs 67 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Note navigation based radio systems only When a disc is Lan inserted the FES switches to dual play mode rear speakers turn off and headphones turn on To switch back to all four speakers on press the headphone button Press VIDEO to change the source displayed on the screen
235. he sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability 241 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information
236. hen AT the brake components are replaced ae Fluid levels between the MIN and M MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid The automatic transmission does not have an underhood transmission fluid dipstick 380 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Transmission fluid should be checked and if required fluid should be added by an authorized dealer Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components TRANSFER CASE FLUID IF EQUIPPED WARNING Turn off the power running boards if equipped before working under the vehicle jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never A place your hand between the amp
237. hen a door is opened and automatically retract when the door is closed e OUT the running boards will remain OUT regardless of the doors being open closed For example use this setting when washing the vehicle or e OFF the running boards will remain IN regardless of the doors being open closed EASY ENTRY This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit entry from the vehicle Press the RESET button to turn the easy entry exit seat on or off PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press the RESET button to turn the rear park assist on or off This function choice will also appear when putting the transmission in reverse and can be turned on off at that time TRAILER SWAY This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway Press the RESET button to turn trailer sway on or off COMPASS if equipped The compass heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE S SW W and NW in the message center display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy 34 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Usually when something affects t
238. hen the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song s title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save more than 20 titles the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved titles and press A v to cycle through the saved titles When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display 44 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A v to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently liste
239. hen washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations 4 0L V6 ENGINE 342 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning 4 6L V8 ENGINE PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commer
240. hese numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer e GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR ew A 258 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus e Example only Tires Wheels and Loading MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXLI XXXXKG Wy WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS RIMS AT XXX KPaXX CPSLCOLD AT XXX KPAXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TPPS R TAXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X X XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX MFD f BY F FORD MC MOTOR C0 XXXX L
241. horized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 384 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications a GLOTA VSa O 1T DX V YdEINW YS H 9IX d S60 IW dSa GTX JO PDX TV 9999W SSM 10 W G9O9IN SSM O T Wd uonvIyn de pio 19qumyN Hed PIOA sS3ILI9VdY ANY SNOILVOlsIDadS LONGOYd JONVNALNIVIN SL N ajryT suoT WNI yueoqn yoo pue surjyerjoueg JJeIDIOJON que qn T Aeidg suog oseoly sodmg YMNW pmIA ayelg APPA I0JOW LOG VuUeLewIoj dq YBIH Yeso107 0 quoleambo 10 oUIVN Ld PIOA uo YYW pue AM X AMY qeys dis mdmo JUOJIJ aseo I JSULIL syutof Tesseatun ouds dys yeysoauq siapulAd yoo sdiijsioyyeom I100q sorely yeas yore Areyixne yoge pooy Suds pue guy 10op Joy EN SOLI yeas SI0JOI pue s zejd Jays 100p soyoyry sosu Apog pny oye 385 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing 2010 Explorer exp USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 9d LEA66EN SSM F A TV TSEL6IN SSM TLA uone de pIo TOQUWNN Led PIOA sed yea dor uwreyshs suTOOD YLeIDIOJON I
242. ia 110 U Universal garage door OPENEE ee ERRE 133 USB POTU ii sst ccsiagsscseeessqetesaccgeeenents 60 vV Vehicle Identification Number VIN rn N 391 Vehicle loading ccceeee 255 Ventilating your vehicle 273 403 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Index WwW rear wiper washet 0008 118 F Windshield washer fluid and womg eon see Lights cae 12 WIDETS preirar E 117 Washer fluid oo ccceceeteeees 352 checking and adding fluid 352 Water Driving through 304 liftgate reservoir EE E 352 WINdOWS ise eee 157 Teplacing wiper blades 353 DON 122 Wrecker towing 0 0 0 cece 331 404 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus
243. ica and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility Using incorrect bulbs may damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty or may not provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of bulbs Headlamp low amp high 2 H13 Front park turn lamp 2 3457 NAK amber Side park turn lamp 2 1 _ Upper rear tail lamp 2 1 Rear backup lamp 2 1 Lower rear optatuntanp O Oo m lamps lamps Front fog lamp DE 9145 Cargo lamp J d 211 2 Interior overhead lamp 1 lt 912 906 Front door courtesy 168 lamp 2 168 T10 1 161 Visor vanity lamp Slide on rail system A6224PF SOR Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of the bulbs frequently To replace any of the interior bulbs see a dealer or qualified technician 112 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs Do not touch the glass of a halogen bulb 1 Turn off the headlamps and open the hood 2 Remove three screws from the headlamp assembly and pull headlamp forward 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Remove the old bulb by turning counterclockwise and pull it out WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic ba
244. ical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction 368 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e T
245. icator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion w
246. icle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom SZ of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 304 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a go
247. ide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high Pull the vehicle trailer over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing If trailer sway is experienced SLOW DOWN During Trailer Sway Control events the f icon in the instrument cluster will flash momentarily The message center will also display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED In some cases when trailer sway is detected the vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a speed at which trailer sway will grow continuously This may cause the system to activate multiple times and you may experience a slight deceleration of the vehicle Disabling Trailer Sway Control Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle See Trailer Sway Control under Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Note that even if it was disabled before turning off the vehicle Trailer Sway Control will be re enabled at each new key cycle WARNING Turning off Trailer Sway Control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this featu
248. iends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 lb Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 6 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity 261 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 lb Now you have the
249. ies out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift lever in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute a oe Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle tr
250. ifying the station has been saved You can save up to six channels in each six in SAT1 six in SAT2 and six in SATS To access your saved channels press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the channel name will appear on the display Listening to a CD MP3 if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press CD to enter CD mode If a disc is already loaded into the system CD play will begin where it ended last 40 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems For a single CD system if a disc is not already loaded insert only one label side up into the CD slot LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display The first track on the disc will begin playing For an in dash six CD system if a disc is not already loaded press can LOAD Select a slot number using J memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to six discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one
251. ighest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 lb 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 Ib 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 lb 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations 260 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal
252. ight turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again 198 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS alll I E Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a
253. ill use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control When you brake hard the front wheels can t turn and if they aren t turning you won t be able to steer The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control If your vehicle has anti lock brakes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes 302 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Driving on snow and
254. im is eventually relearned When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected 360 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Always dispose of automotive 9 batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized Y A 1 standards for disposal Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in t
255. imum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel 316 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel addition
256. in slippery conditions that require tire cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment 303 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of veh
257. in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode 190 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to disengage the automatic locking mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive mode WARNING After any vehicle collision the combination lap and shoulder belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly in addition to other checks for proper safety belt system function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLAC
258. inds may also make the steering seem to wander pull PREPARING TO DRIVE WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 284 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate ha
259. ing distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If ABs the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately 276 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the parking brake is released Driving O BRAKE WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can
260. ing boards refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter e This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed OUT position for access to the roof e When running boards are manually set in the deployed position the boards will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h 126 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Enable disable To enable disable the power running board feature refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter e When this feature is disabled OFF the running boards will move to the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors e When this feature is enabled AUTO the running boards will move back to the correct positions based off of the door positions Bounce back e If an object is in the way of the moving running board the running board will automatically bounce back in the reverse direction and move to the end of travel Note The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures In adverse conditions debris such as mud dirt and salt may become trapped in the running board mechanism possibly leading to unwanted noise If this occurs manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flush the system in particular the front and rear hinge arms with a high pressure car wash wand Note Do not use the running boards front a
261. ing load o n 262 n es S es Op ctor tepeer shes Capacities for refilling fluids 3885 udio system see Radio aaa 39 43 50 Car2U garage door opener 140 Automatic transmissioti Cargo COVED wcsiseiseis cimcressiidsees 145 driving an automatic Cargo management system 146 OVELOTIVE 4 ccsccesdensanessceviess 286 288 Cell ph 9 fluid adding ona I0 E fluid checking o 380 Changing a tire eee 315 fluid refill capacities 385 Child safety seats cccce 218 fluid specification 385 attaching with tether Auxiliary input jack Line in 58 straps A A A E 226 J IN TONG Seat orendive 219 Auxiliary power point 121 iN rear S at wees 219 Axle WAT GH erp tars oh ni 222 lubricant specifications 385 recommendations 008 216 398 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Child safety seats booster SCAU O E A EE 229 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 342 instrument panel 0008 344 UNMGOQIOR series nsir anere e 345 pl sti PariS Hs eave histone 343 WASHING se Enea 340 WOKING naits Ra 341 wheels manara 341 wiper blades ccceeeeeeeees 343 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 101 Clock adjust 6 CD in dash wee eeeeeeeee 52 AM FM CD oo ceccccccccctcceteeeneees 45 Compass electronic Calibration oo eeeeceeeeseeeeeee 27 set zone adjustment 27 36 CONS
262. ing to the button command Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons Note The system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it will be necessary to erase the current settings using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices being used 144 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To erase programming on the Car2U system individual buttons cannot be erased use the following procedure 1 Firmly press the two outside Car2U system buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights begin to blink rapidly The indicator lights are located directly above the buttons NZ 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release your fingers from the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system it is recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes and modifications to the Car2U syste
263. ion does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 209 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety Canopy system 4 WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy system its fuses the A B or C pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy Contact your authorized dealer as soo
264. ior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time It is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code If you do not know if your garage door opener is a rolling code or fixed code device open your garage door opener s remote control battery cover If a panel of DIP switches is present your garage door opener is a fixed code device If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device Rolling code programming Note Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so you will know which actions are time sensitive If you do not follow the time sensitive actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter NS 1 Firmly press the two outer Car2U system buttons for 1 2 seconds then release 141 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Go to the garage to locate the garage door opener motor and its learn button You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the unit s cover or light lens to locate the learn button Press the learn button after which you will have 10 30 seconds to return to your vehicle and complete t
265. ipped A WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop f WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 170 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket Gf equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system
266. ipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 63 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the
267. is method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press D to activate the alarm The horn will sound and the parklamps will flash for a maximum of three minutes Press again or turn the ignition to the on position to deactivate or wait for the alarm to timeout in three minutes Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Memory seats and adjustable pedals feature if equipped The remote entry system can also control the memory seat adjustable pedals easy entry exit feature Press 2 to automatically move the seat and adjustable pedals to the desired memory position the seat position corresponds to the transmitter being used Activating the memory seat feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat and adjustable pedals to the position desired 157 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press the SET control on the lower center portion of the instrument panel 3 Within five seconds press one control on the remote transmitter and then press the 1 or 2 control on the lower center portion of the 1 2 instrument panel which you would like to associate with the seat and Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions 4 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory seat feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press the SET control on the driv
268. is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel ca
269. isplay in the message center as words and function the same as the warning light Note Depending on which options your vehicle has some indicators may not be present in your vehicle 12 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the light remains on while driving the temperature of the engine may be too high refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Sp
270. itch on the side of the shift lever e This position allows for all forward gears 1 5 except overdrive Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e O D OFF lamp is illuminated 0 D e To return to O D overdrive OFF mode press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated g Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 3 Third Transmission operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Transmission operates in 2nd gear only Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Transmission operates in 1st gear only e Provides maximum engine braking 290 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Drive only e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your v
271. ith the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat 204 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Pass Airbag Off Occupant En Passenger Airbag Empty seat Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
272. ith the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 168 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped A WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward Pull lever up to adjust seatback WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 169 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Using the manual lumbar support if equipped For more lumbar support turn the A lumbar support control toward the front of vehicle For less lumbar support turn the l lumbar support control toward the rear of vehicle gt Adjusting the front power seat if equ
273. ition is turned on A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system y WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of 208 2010 Explorer exp
274. ity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sport cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increase risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death 149 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS One key operates all the locks and starts the vehicle Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency Your keys are programmed to your vehicle using a non programmed key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your authorized dealer supplied keys replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section later in this chapter for more information POWER DOOR LOCKS Press control to unlock or lock all doors Smart unlocking feature The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle With the key in any ignition position the driver s door will automatically unlock if it is locked using the lock control on the driver s door panel while the driver s door is open Autolock The a
275. ity to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 247 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT I
276. ive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 e Creating discs with only one level of folders will help
277. k to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Placing the 2nd row 60 40 seats in cargo mode if equipped The 2nd row seats can be placed in a kneel down load floor position to allow more cargo space To place the seats in the cargo mode 1 Fold down the 2nd row seat See Folding down the 2nd row 60 40 seats and bucket seats above 2 Lift the cargo mode lever located on the back of the seatback to kneel the seat down and get a flat loading floor 178 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor position The seatback cannot be returned to the upright position until the seat is returned from the kneel down position To return the seat to the upright position 1 Push the seat rearward until the latch is engaged Use the cushion or seatback to return to the fold down position Do not use the recliner handle as it could cause damage to the handle 2 Return the seatback to the upright position Adjusting the 2nd row seat for E Z Entry The E Z entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the 3rd row seat To enter the 3rd row seat 1 Fold down the 2nd row seat and release the handle Refer to Folding down the 2nd row 60 40 seats and bucket seats earlier in this section Note When folding down the seat li
278. l air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance in panel mode e Select MAX A C mode MAX A C uses recirculated air with A C to provide a cooler airflow e Move the temperature control to the coolest setting e Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust in order to maintain comfort To allow side window defogging and demisting while warming up the vehicle cabin 1 Select F 2 Select A C 3 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel To allow windshield defogging and demisting while warming up vehicle 1 Select Y floor defrost mode 2 Set temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set fan to highest setting 100 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DATC SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED soe 1 A C control Manually turns A C on or off 2 Recirculation control Cools the vehicle more quickly by recirculating the cabin air instead of using outside air and helps prevent unpleasant outside odors or fumes from entering the vehicle Press to turn on off 3 Passenger side temperature control Controls the temperature on the passenger side
279. l be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 336 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate
280. l not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated the passenger side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries 203 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the radio Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the ind
281. large frontal trailers high outside temperatures and highway speeds the coolant gauge may indicate higher than normal coolant temperatures If this occurs reduce speed until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range Refer to Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter Anticipate stops and brake gradually Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information Trailer towing tips Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight 267 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Mainten
282. le is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system press the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon 4 will illuminate steadily Pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again will turn off the sliding car icon igi In R Reverse ABS and the Engine and Brake Traction Control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Sliding R RSC ESC start up pressed momentarily Button pressed and held more than five seconds Flashes then solid 40 km h 40 km h 40 km h 40 km h Trailer Sway Control When properly equipped trailer sway control will use the vehicle s AdvanceTrac with RSC system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and if necessary by reducing engine power Trailer sway control is only enabled above 40 mph 64 km h 282 2010 Explorer exp Owners Gu
283. least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 379 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating o temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir 5 The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 6 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the correct operating range Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type BRAKE FLUID f The fluid level will drop slowly as eeno the brakes wear and will rise w
284. lect the TRIP B feature To reset the trip press and hold the stem until it resets Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MILES km TO EMPTY This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display FUEL LEVEL LOW and sound a tone for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you reset this warning message this display and tone will return within 10 minutes DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected 21 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster AVERAGE FUEL XX X MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences i
285. lluminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section If the control on the overhead lamp is in the door position the perimeter alarm system if equipped will deactivate Switching from two step to one step door unlocking Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled Unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and holding both the A and ma buttons simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four seconds The parklamps will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking Repeat the procedure to switch back to two step unlocking 156 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Locking the doors liftgate 6 1 Press and release to lock all the doors and liftgate The lamps will flash Note If any door the liftgate or the liftgate glass are not closed properly the lamps will not flash 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and locked Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the lamps flash once Note If any door the liftgate or the liftgate glass are not closed properly the horn will make two quick chirps Opening the liftgate window Press L to unlatch the liftgate window Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that th
286. load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this owner s guide WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle Calculating the load your vehicle can carry tow 1 Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart in the Trailer towing section in this chapter for your type of engine and rear axle ratio 2 Weigh your vehicle without cargo To obtain correct weights take your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks 3 Subtract your loaded weight from
287. lock to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed 8 Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter 9 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters 10 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been exited Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition is turned to the accessory or on position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control Gf equipped must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position 160 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without using a key e open the liftgate window e activate or deactivate the autolock feature The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code
288. long chirp if trim switch inhibit was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 154 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock e Move control down to disengage childproof locks REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e
289. lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases 225 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching child safety seats with tether straps ite Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available
290. ls on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Note The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS indicator light may illuminate depending on how much air is released from your tires and or how long you drive the vehicle under these conditions Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution 300 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD and 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and a
291. ly inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 239 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which l
292. m away to expose the anchor and make it easier to attach some child seats WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death 224 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 592 mm 23 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH
293. m transmitter by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the equipment CARGO COVER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo area cover that covers the luggage compartment of your vehicle To install the cover Press both ends of the cover into the depressions right side first in the trim panels behind the second row seat WARNING To reduce the risk of injuries the cargo area cover must be properly installed on the rear trim panels 145 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not place any objects on the cargo area cover They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the case of a sudden stop or collision Cargo management system The cargo management system consists of storage compartments located in the floor of the rear cargo area 7 passenger stowage 1 To open lift up on the handle and the lid 2 To close lower and press the lid down 5 passenger stowage When the lid is open it will stand up on its own 1 To open lift the release handle and the lid 2 To close lower the lid lift the release handle and press down on the lid 146 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls REAR LIFTGATE The liftgate area is only intended for cargo not passengers You can open and close the liftgate from outside the vehi
294. mately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Four wheel drive operation if equipped is less fuel efficient than two wheel drive operation e Close windows for high speed driving 376 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates Contact your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM tC Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure t
295. ment slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 297 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle get
296. ment for proper installation 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat 222 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the following seating positions In addition six passenger and seven passenger LATCH lower anchor posi
297. mes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death Note Turn off the power running boards if equipped before driving with a dissimilar spare tire wheel Refer to Running boards in the Driver Controls chapter If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired 315 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond max
298. minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module 199 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the airbag module Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Modifications to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and non Ford tow hooks may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle with anything other than authorized Ford accessories for your vehicle WARNING Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury 200 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus S
299. mpliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 394 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage
300. must be closed and remain closed throughout the configuration process 1 Turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control three times ci A 3 Turn the ignition from the on to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp 6 Press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 151 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Keyless entry keypad procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all doors the liftgate and liftgate window 3 Enter 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Message center procedure For information on activating deactivating the autolock feature using the vehicle s message center if equipped refer to Message center information in the Instrument cluster chapter Autounlock The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ig
301. n as possible 210 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy system is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy How does the Safety Canopy system work The design and development of the Safety Canopy system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon curtain with an inflator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors one on each side of the vehicle e A headliner that will flex to open above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two side crash sensors mounted at the front doors one on each side of the vehicle e Two side crash sensors located at the c pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle e Roll over sensor in the restraints control module
302. n be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 234 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loadin
303. n changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 382 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Changing the air filter element e 4 0L Engine e 4 6L Engine 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 383 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS For spark plug replacement see your aut
304. n on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention 27 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing the SELECT RESET stem This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DOOR AJAR Displayed when a door is not completely closed REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT Displayed when objects are by the passenger seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SERVICE RSC NOW Displayed when the system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage when the engine is running If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible If the warning stays on or comes on
305. n the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the SELECT RESET stem press and hold for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings SETUP MENU HOLD RESET When this appears press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to reach the setup menu Briefly press the SELECT RESET stem to scroll through the setup menu items If the SELECT RESET stem is not pressed within four seconds the message center returns to the info menu e System Check e AWD Lock 4 6L engine vehicles only e Units English Metric e Language Autolamp e Autolock e Autounlock e Park Aid Gf equipped e Trailer sway control e Oil Life Reset and Start Value e Compass display 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e Compass zone adjustment e Compass calibration adjustment SYSTEM CHECK HOLD RESET Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to select system check when this is displayed in the message center The message center will cycle through each of the systems being monitored For each of
306. n2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down gt toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved v Y by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing the rear window wiper blade To replace the rear wiper blade 1 Pull the wiper arm as far away from the glass as possible Do not use excessive force because it can break the wiper arm Hold it there until the next step 2 Grasp the wiper blade and rotate it away from the wiper arm using moderate force until it disengages from the wiper arm 3 Once the wiper blade is loose slide it away from the wiper arm 353 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 To attach the new wiper
307. nager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 334 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable
308. ncrease A or decrease A the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Press and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD 10 SHUFFLE Press to play all tracks on the current CD MP3 disc in random order 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD or CD MP3 12 q N Speaker Headphone Single Dual Play Press to toggle between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted You can also press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function 13 Numeric Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 15 MEDIA Press to cycle through the possible media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD LINE IN if equipped DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources 16 VIDEO Press to cycle through video states DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD Off 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the FES 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release for the previous chapter Pr
309. nd or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running OPENING THE HOOD imp 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood 349 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 0L V6 engine LA A D VIO a Nl ow ob Y AN ve e l 10 Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick out of view Brake fluid reservoir Power distribution box 1 2 3 4 5 Battery 6 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 Radiator cap 8 Engine coolant reservoir 9 Air filter assembly 10 Washer fluid reservoir 350 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 6L V8 engine Air filter assembly 1 2 Engine oil filler cap 3 Engine oil dipstick 4 Brake fluid reservoir 5 6 7 8 9 Power distribution box Battery Power steering fluid reservoir Radiator cap Engine coolant reservoir 10 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 351 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002
310. nd playing CD R and CD RW discs which are more susceptible to damage from heat light and stress than are regular CDs e Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat with the playing surface facing down in order to prevent damage to the disc or the player e Never insert any object other than a compact disc CD or digital versatile disc DVD into the player as doing so may damage the player and may cause injury to you e Do not disassemble the player The laser used in disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm 4 75 in audio compact discs and digital versatile discs DVD DVD R and R W discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD and DVD players Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached and CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the FES DVD system The label may peel and cause the CD or DVD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Playing a DVD 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Ensure that the navigation system is on 3 Insert a DVD label side
311. nd possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available 364 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration bel
312. nd rear hinge assemblies running board motors or the running board under body mounts to lift the vehicle when jacking Please utilize proper jacking points Refer to Changing the tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter WARNING In extreme climates excessive ice buildup may occur causing the running boards not to deploy Be sure that the running boards have deployed and have finished moving before attempting to step on them Note The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared WARNING Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle Never place your hand between the extended running board and the vehicle A moving running board may cause injury 127 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Setting speed conirol The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press the SET control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed m
313. ndicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 248 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire RAR Fy56180016 105m S OY Ly 1S4 09
314. ndling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed 1 Apply the parking brake turn ignition key to off then remove the key 2 Remove the rubber pad at the bottom of the cup holder to locate the access cap of the floor shifter assembly 3 Using a screwdriver or equivalent remove the access panel and depress the shifter lever on the shift mechanism 4 Apply the brake and shift into N Neutral 5 Return the cover plug to the console access hole Start the vehicle If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 285 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If
315. ndow approximately two to three inches One touch up or down Driver s window only if equipped This feature allows the driver s window to open or close fully without holding the control down 122 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To operate one touch down e Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal close or one touch up position during a one touch down event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal close or one touch up To operate one touch up e Pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal open or one touch down position during a one touch up event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal open or one touch down Bounce back driver s window only When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the window is moving upward the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned off
316. ne rating soererocereeisis 371 401 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Index Oil see Engine oil 354 illuminated entry cce 160 locking unlocking P MOE da urairesnecronivigenie 156 157 panic AAPM ooo eeeeeeeeeeeees 157 Parking brake cc eee 277 replacing the batteries 158 Parts see Motorcraft parts 384 i Reverse sensing system 291 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 00 185 Roadside assistance 0 305 Pedals see Power adjustable Roof rack neseser 148 foot Pedals sc ccesscwesscaessvecsaceees 126 Power adjustable foot pedals 126 S Power deployable running WOAP OS scserssxiitcdandisseuneendussrn 126 Safety belts see Safety Power distribution box restraints cee 184 187 192 see FUSES oats peat etait 311 Safety Canopy 208 210 211 Power door locks sesresmriera 150 Safety defects reporting 339 Power mirrors cceeeeeeeeeeteeees 125 Safety restraints 184 187 192 Power POINt eceeeesceeseeteeees 121 Belt Minder ccccccceceees 194 Power steering wc 283 extension assembly 44 193 fluid checking and adding 380 for adults EE EEEE 188 191 fluid refill capacity n 385 for children seseeseesenseasensecees 214 fluid specifications scnsivsatcaiins 385 Occupant Classification DENSOM scicversssssesssesessgoasneuescessees 185 Power Windows c ccceceeeees 12
317. ng System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 LIFTGATE GLASS AJAR Displayed when the liftgate or the liftgate glass is not completely closed TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED Displayed when your trailer starts to sway when towing Refer to Trailer sway control in the Driving chapter for more information FOR 4X4 LOW STOP VEHICLE if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N if equipped Displayed when 4X4 LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped For more information refer to Using the Control Trac 4WD system in the Driving chapter TO EXIT 4X4 LOW STOP VEHICLE if equipped Displayed when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating
318. ng clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 220 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downw
319. ng in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display OK Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK For further information refer to the SYNC supplement If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 7 SHUFFLE Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display 55 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER In folder mode ee press FOLDER p gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD 11 REW Rewind Press REW to Ta manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory pres
320. nition is in the on position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the off or accessory position and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the off or accessory position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock Your vehicle comes with the autounlock feature activated There are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e Performing the power door lock control procedure or e Performing the keyless entry keypad if equipped procedure or e Performing the message center if equipped procedure Before following the activation or deactivation procedures make sure that the anti theft system is not armed ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate window are closed 152 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Power door unlock lock procedure You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait 30 seconds Note All doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the configuration process 1 Turn the ignition to the on position
321. not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses 121 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front wi
322. nsider T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disable enabled during the same k
323. nt pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter The Electronic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control RSC the sliding car icon 4 in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle 281 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving The Roll Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC If the vehic
324. nty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 30 or an equivalent SAE 5W 30 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C929 A Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this section for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 307 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 6L 3V V8 Engine Look for this certification trademark PREMU SYNTHETIC BL MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japane
325. o place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 245 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire
326. o subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Ok Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD mode If Ne a disc is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the last loaded disc will begin to pl
327. o its original position to lock the steering column WARNING Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp 118 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Slide on rod feature Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package Storage compartment Press the latch to open the storage compartment 119 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Installing a garage door opener if equipped The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of aftermarket garage door openers e Place the VELCRO hook onto the side of the aftermarket transmitter opposite of the button Place the transmitter into storage compartment button down e Place the provided height adaptors onto the back of the door as needed e Close the door e Press the depression in the door to activate the transmitter CENTER CONSOLE 1 Cupholders 2 Tissue holder in lid 3 Rear power point 4 Large utility c
328. o the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management feature section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer 186 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors front passenger sensing system and the driver seat position sensor In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the even
329. od spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts 305 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e towing of your disabled
330. of the vehicle when in dual zone mode To enter dual zone press the passenger temperature control or DUAL The passenger temperature will appear in the display 4 Rear defroster control Removes ice and fog from the rear window Press to turn on off 101 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 5 DUAL Single dual electric ea temperature control Allows the driver to have full control of the cabin temperature settings single zone or allows the passenger to have control of their individual temperature settings dual zone control Press to turn on dual zone mode press again to return to single zone 6 QQ Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents 7 Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents Note Some airflow will come out of the small vents near the side windows 8 A Distributes air through the floor vents Note Some airflow will come out of the small vents near the side windows 9 lt A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents 10 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents 11 OFF Outside air is shut out and o the fan will not operate Note If equipped with the auxiliary system the auxiliary fan can still operate with the front system off 12 AUTO Press to select the uro desired temperature shown in the display window The system
331. ol system is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation Traction Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition and will continue to function during the cool down period The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following 280 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During Electronic Stability Control events the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Electronic Stability Control system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accide
332. old the stem down at this point as you do not want to enter the system check Instead quickly release the stem and repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup menu until the message center displays COMPASS ZONE XxX 4 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem for approximately two seconds until the message center to enter the compass zone adjustment mode 5 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem until the message center displays CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE This step may require up to five circles to complete the calibration NOTE If the SELECT RESET stem is pressed during the calibration or three minutes has elapsed since the beginning of the calibration without driving the vehicle the message center reverts back to normal operation and the CAL will display until a successful calibration is carried out 6 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE message changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take actio
333. ompartment has an exterior power point in front of the lid and inside the compartment has coin holder slots a power point AIJ Audio Input Jack USB port and a business credit card holder The rear side of the console may incorporate the following features e Air vents e Cupholders 120 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Rear center console features if equipped The rear center console incorporates the following features e Utility compartment e Cupholders e Flip forward armrest to provide a flat load floor AUXILIARY POWER POINTS 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e On the front of the center console e Inside the utility compartment e On the rear of the console accessible from the rear seats Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is
334. on top of the instrument panel e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If the vehicle doesn t start try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily the vehicle will not start contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the accessory position The theft indicator will flash every two seconds when the vehicle is armed 163 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the vehicle e The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out e If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly contact your authorized
335. one channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A amp B will be connected to FES DISC 85 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Menu mode Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if available Press MENU twice to access the DVD set up menu and the following features 1 ZOOM 2 ANGLE 3 ASPECT RATIO 4 LANGUAGE TANGUAGE SUB TITLES 5 SUB TITLES COMPRESSION A RESTORE DEFAULTS E BACK Angle mode Select ANGLE to select various angles of view for the DVD ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE SUB TITLES 5 COMPRESSION B RESTORE DEFAULTS Be BACK This is disc dependent some DVD discs may have more viewing angles to select from Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is Angle 1 Aspect ratio Select ASPECT RATIO to select the viewing size and shape of the video displayed on the LCD screen This is disc dependent B o LANGUAGE SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS J 86 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems You can select from WIDE LETTER DVD SETUP BOX or PAN SCAN Once you have SELECT THE DESIRED ASPECT RATIO made your selection press ENTER WIDE 16 9 to confirm The LCD screen display Beiuleist bey PAN SCAN will immediately change to y
336. ook like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm sx 7y When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended 240 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on t
337. opriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 216 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education
338. or sensor tower 4 0L engine only 45B Cd Notused ooo a a Po Notused S Po Notus S O Fuelpumprelay PAC clutch relay o O Foglampsrelay O o Notused S o Notused S O One touch integrated start OTIS a See si Trailer battery charger relay Front wiperrelay O Po PCMrelay S Starterrelay S Blowerrelay o T s Cartridge Fuses 314 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving e do not brake heavily e gradually decrease the vehicle s speed e hold the steering wheel firmly e slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used WARNING Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor beco
339. ose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish French Japanese or Arabic Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message center through each of the language choices Press the RESET button to set the language choice AUTOLAMP This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press the RESET button to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Press the RESET button to turn autolock on or off AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off 33 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Press the RESET button to turn autounlock on or off RUNNING BRDS if equipped This feature automatically deploys the side running boards for easy entry exit from the vehicle or for cleaning 1 To disable enable the power running board feature the vehicle must be in P Park 2 To change operation of the power running board feature select this function from the SETUP MENU 3 Press the RESETbutton to select the running boards setting as follows e AUTOMATIC the running boards will automatically deploy w
340. other vehicles parked next to your vehicle 155 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors and liftgate open the liftgate window without a key and activate the panic alarm The remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position The liftgate glass feature operates as long as the vehicle s speed is less than 3 mph 5 km h The panic feature operates with the key in the off position If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Two step door unlocking 1 Press C and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position and the perimeter alarm system if equipped will deactivate 2 Press C and release again within three seconds to unlock the passenger doors the liftgate and liftgate glass The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position One step door unlocking If the one step door unlocking feature is activated press and release once to unlock all of the doors the liftgate and liftgate glass Note The interior lamps will i
341. our selection after the system resumes playback of the DVD The system default is WIDE 16 9 Language Select LANGUAGE to select the l language you would like to use for SEL PED FUNCTION audio output English Spanish ZOOM French This is disc dependent H ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE SUB TITLES EE COMPRESSION E RESTORE DEFAULTS Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is English Subtitles Select SUBTITLES to turn the subtitle option on or off The system default is OFF ANGLE ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE SUB TITLES EEE COMPRESSION S RESTORE DEFAULTS 87 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm This is disc dependent Audio CDs To play audio CDs on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Ensure that the DVD system is on 3 Insert an audio CD into the DVD system label side up 4 The track and elapsed time will CD AUDIO DISC ma 2 00 54 appear in the status bar Use the DVD cursor controls on the bezel to highlight which track you would like to play You can also use the cursor controls to highlight COMPRESSION SHUFFLE or SCAN Once you have highlighted the desired track or function press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm your selection COMP Compression Compression brings so
342. over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system they may listen to another over the headphones DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen to the same audio source SHARED MODE will appear on the radio Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel There are two ways to get into dual play mode 1 After initially turning ignition on when a disc is inserted the FES immediately switches to dual play mode 2 Press the A t headphone speaker Lov button on the DVD player or navigation radio touch screen 3 Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time Repeating each of these actions will switch back to single play mode all speakers playing and headphones off The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate The system can output two different audio sources over the headphones These are called Channel A and Channel B Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared CIR wireless headphones Press the Headphone Control button A to change the audio source for Channel A 83 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st
343. ow 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection 365 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications What you should know about fail safe cooling 4 6L V8 engine only If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain Fail safe cooling and engine oil overheat mode 4 6L V8 only If the engine coolant and or engine oil overheat the vehicle s fail safe modes will reduce engine power to limit engine damage even with a total loss of coolant The vehicle s range and or speed will be reduced depending on vehicle load terrain and outside temperatures The instrument cluster provides warnings for eac
344. p and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Front and rear seats 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle e Front and rear seats All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have three types of locking modes described below Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Webbing extraction sensitive mode The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly The belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it 189 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack
345. ped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products 125 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift A lever is in the P Park position CN Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal v toward you or away from you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS IF EQUIPPED Deployable running boards DRB automatically move when the doors are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle Automatic power deploy e The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are opened Automatic power stow e The running boards will return to the stowed position when the doors are closed There will be a two second delay before the running boards move in to the stowed position Manual power deploy To manually operate the runn
346. pin and loss of traction Electronic Stability Control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes an AdvanceTrac f with RSC Off button on the center of the instrument panel and a sliding car icon 5 in the instrument cluster The sliding car icon igi in the instrument cluster will iluminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check or during driving if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the sliding car icon f illuminates steadily verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center stack of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon f remains steadily illuminated or if the message center if equipped displays SERVICE RSC NOW have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 279 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving When AdvanceTrac wi
347. pped Iluminates when the windshield washer fluid is low Turn signal luminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb 17 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster High beams IIluminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Turn signal warning chime Sounds when the turn signal lever has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 2 miles 3 2 km Parking brake on warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h Message center activation chime Sounds when the following warnings DOOR AJAR LOW FUEL LEVEL or LOW TIRE PRESSURE appear in the message center display for the first time GAUGES 18 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At
348. pped CD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources Note Refer to Single play Dual play for more information Using the infrared IR wireless headphones 1 Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON 2 Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B control on the ear piece 3 Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece 71 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Using wired headphones not included WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves 1 Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either side of the DVD system Each side is labeled A Aor A B Headphones plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into jack B will listen to Channel B 2 Adjust the volume levels using the volume controls on the DVD system VOLUME To adjust display brightness To decrease increase the brightness level on the display screen press the brightness control on the DVD system A display will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness level The brightness display will only appear when the menu is not displayed 72 2010 Explorer
349. r nozzle allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within the fuel filler housing and to the ground If the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message comes on the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed The inlet may have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing At the next opportunity safely pull off the road turn off the engine open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel see Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the Check Fuel Fill Inle
350. r imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com 94 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Safety information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves
351. r the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Energy management feature e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user s chest WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 188 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Combination la
352. r via remote entry system the seat position will travel to the desired memory setting less 2 inches 5 cm Once entering the vehicle and inserting the key in the ignition while in P Park the easy entry feature will move the seat an additional 2 inches 5 cm to the desired memory location See Locks and Security for activating the memory seat feature through the remote entry system 173 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Deactivating activating the easy access easy out feature The easy entry exit feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle message center if equipped If your vehicle does not have a message center the feature can be turned off or on through the following process 1 Put the key into the ignition The driver seat may move forward if the easy entry exit feature is activated 2 Place the ignition key into the on position do not start the vehicle When the vehicle is in the on position the interior and exterior lights the climate controls and the radio are functional without the engine started See Programming remote transmitters for ignition switch diagram 3 Turn the ignition key to the off position 4 Cycle the ignition key between the off position and the on position a total of three times ending with the ignition in the off position 5 Engage the forward or rearward seat switch 6 Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch
353. rcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle 242 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passeng
354. re identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Hus Mini fuses Standard Maxi fuses pride rating fuses maxi fuses a Grey Grey 3A Videt Violet 308 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located below the instrument panel on the driver s side ETER EST EA CC Laca ce Ss eS EA HE E HE The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Dee ne eee 20A Moon roof Adjustable pedals O ae re 3 20A Radio Navigation amplifier GPS ae a a 10 1 4 A On board diagnostic OBD ID connector 309 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 5 5A Moon roof Door lock switch illumination Auto dimming rear view mirror a i unlock lock pA Trailer stop turn Ignition switch power Passive anti theft system PATS Cluster 2A 6R Transmission control module Powertrain control module Ignition RUN START Fuel pump r
355. re except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental e g hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer 283 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crossw
356. recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the on position e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is in the on position A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter UNLOCK control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for more information on how to use the keypad refer to Remote entry system and Keyless entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Easy entry exit feature if equipped The easy entry feature automatically moves the driver s seat 2 inches 5 cm forward when e the transmission is in P Park e the key is inserted into the ignition cylinder Cf the seat is located less than 2 inches 5 cm from the front of the seat track the seat will travel up to 1 4 inch 64 cm to the front of the seat track The easy out feature automatically moves the driver s seat 2 inches 5 cm backward when e the transmission is in P Park e the key is removed from the ignition cylinder Cf the seat is located less than 2 inches 5 cm from the rear of the seat track the seat will travel up to 1 4 inch 64 cm to the rear of the seat track If the memory setting is programmed through the remote transmitter upon unlocking the doo
357. rer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 231 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching
358. rm when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system 344 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white
359. rocedure from Step 1 165 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust release gt button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove button 4 166 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st
360. rong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood WARNING Several Safety Canopy system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus 212 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the Safety Canopy system has deployed the Safety Canopy will not function again The Safety Canopy system including the A B and C pillar trim must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the Safety Canopy is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard
361. ry system parts 328 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 329 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 330 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING Note Turn off the power running boards if equipped prior to preparing the vehicle for towing Refer to Power deployable running boards in t
362. s Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene lacquer thinner acetone or any other solvent Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures e direct sunlight e high humidity e a dusty
363. s Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible e If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the r
364. s chapter Engine coolant temperature luminates when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter e Standard instrument cluster e Optional instrument cluster WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 15 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Iuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tives Wheels and Loading chapter Low tire pressure warning O Check fuel cap fill inlet if equipped Iluminates when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Continued driving with this light on may cause the service engine soon warning light to come on refer to Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specification chapter If CHECK FUEL FILL INLET is displayed in the message center refer to Message center in this c
365. s chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting dow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent 374 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifi
366. s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 246 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size cod
367. s stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 298 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering ac
368. safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A A Child Seat Tether N Anchor FALS Anti Lock Brake System Stability Control System i Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based vel Master Lighting Switch f n h 0 Yo Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard W
369. sary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in this chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle 299 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Parking On some 4WD vehicles when the transfer case is in the N Neutral position the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline Therefore the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P Park or the manual transmission is in gear Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer AWD Systems if equipped AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four whee
370. se and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Reverse steps to reinstall bulb s 113 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker bulbs 1 Turn off the headlamps and open the hood 2 Remove three screws from the headlamp assembly and pull headlamp forward 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Reverse steps to reinstall bulb s Replacing tail brake turn backup lamp bulbs 1 Turn the headlamps off and open the liftgate 2 Remove the two bolts from the lamp assembly 3 Remove the lamp assembly by pulling it away from the vehicle at an angle to disengage the two snap attachments 114 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Reverse steps to reinstall bulb s Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is L off f 2 Remove the bulb socket from the N fog lamp by turning it counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector Reverse steps to reinstall bulb s Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is of
371. se automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this section for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 358 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service z7 DWD S A If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cl
372. selections when in any menu When not in a menu and in DVD mode press lt gt to adjust the brightness A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness levels 75 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player 23 __ lt gt _ 1 eee Ism 1 Power control Press to turn the FES Family Entertainment System ON OFF 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a Menu the left and right cursor controls decrease and increase the display brightness 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of the FES functions and adjustments 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 ANGLE DVD dependent Press to select the angle to view the scene 6 Channel A B Press to select either A or B headphones and then use the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the headphones 76 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 VOL Volume When in Single Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to i
373. service of other components 323 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Re stowing the jack and tools 1 Unblock the wheels 2 Stow the wheel ornament if removed in a safe location in the vehicle such as the glove box or jack stowage compartment so it will not become damaged Re install the wheel ornament onto the wheel once the tire is repaired or replaced 3 Stow the jack and tools in their respective locations making sure they are fully secured so they do not rattle when you drive WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance rotation flat tire wheel removal etc Lug nut socket Wheel lug nut torque size Bolt size Lug nut socket size 3 4 100 135 inch 19 mm hex Bolt size 4 x 20 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the whe
374. splay this represents the trip mode Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset 30 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVERAGE FUEL XX X MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level
375. splay to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DOOR AJAR Displayed when a door is not completely closed 36 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT Displayed when objects are by the passenger seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SERVICE RSC NOW Displayed when the system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Hasy Fuel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed
376. ss the SET control 129 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Press the brake pedal This will not erase your vehicle s previously set speed e Press the speed control OFF control Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased Gp STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS These controls allow you to operate some radio control features Audio control features Press MEDIA to select e AM FM1 FM2 e SAT1 SAT2 or SAT3 Satellite Radio mode if equipped e CD if equipped e DVD FES Gf equipped e LINE IN Auxiliary input jack In AM FM1 or FM2 mode Press ad SEEK PP to select preset stations within the selected radio band or press and hold to select the next previous radio frequency In Satellite radio mode if equipped e Press ad SEEK PP to advance through preset channels 130 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls In CD mode if equipped e Press dd SEEK Pe to select the next selection on the CD USB or press and hold to forward or reverse through the CD USB In DVD mode if equipped e Refer to the Family entertainment DVD system in the Entertainment Systems chapter In any mode e Press VOL or to adjust volume Navigation system hands free
377. ssure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 237 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to
378. stracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 50 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 1 A yv Tune Disc selector In radio mode press to manually go up A or down v the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In menu mode use to select various settings In CD MP3 mode press to select the desired disc In satellite radio mode if equipped press A v to tune to the next previous channel In CATEGORY MODE press W to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to Category Mode under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to af access SYNC PHONE f
379. t lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message on may cause the Service Engine Soon lamp to turn on as well 370 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury bp Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using
380. t of a collision Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly 187 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wea
381. t position tumble the seat again and re latch it to the floor Be sure that cargo or other objects are not trapped underneath the seatback 4 Lift up on the head restraint until gt A it locks into its original position ar N 180 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Note In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats the 2nd row recline unlatch handle on the outboard sides of both 60 and 40 seats should not be used as a grab handle to raise the entire seat up from cargo mode kneeling position or to lower it from its tumbled position This handle is there only to recline the seat back and to unlatch the rear seat floor attachment in order to tumble the seat in the forward direction To raise the seat up from the cargo mode kneeling position the entire seat should be lifted up using the seat back or the seat cushion area as a grabbing surface Exiting the 3rd row 1 Lower the head restraints See Folding down the 2nd row 60 40 seats and buckets seats earlier in this section 2 Pull on the lever strap as equipped located a
382. t the bottom right of the seat back to release the seat from the floor and rotate the seat up towards the front seat 3 Follow the directions above to return the seatback from the load floor and to the upright position 181 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3rd row folding seat if equipped Before folding the third row seats fold the head restraints down by pulling on the strap located under the restraint Pull up on the handle located behind the seatback while pushing the seatback forward and down into the seat cushion WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 3rd row power folding seat if equipped Note Be sure that head restraints are folded down before powering the 3rd row seat down 182 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The control buttons are located on the driver side rear quarter trim panel accessible from the liftgate area Push the bottom portion of the control button to lower the desired seatback Push the top of the control b
383. tem or wait for more than four seconds to return to the info menu Note Oil Life Start Value of 100 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months For example setting oil life start value to 60 sets the oil life start value to 3 000 miles 4 800 km and 120 days COMPASS if equipped The compass heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE S SW W and NW in the message center display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment 25 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Do the following to set the proper zone Compass zone adjustment 1 Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referring to the zone map
384. ter battery replacement Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote entry transmitters maximum of six available before beginning this procedure If all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming procedure the transmitters that are not present during programming will no longer operate the vehicle Note Ensure the brake pedal is not depressed during this sequence To reprogram the remote entry transmitters 1 Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked 2 Put the key in the ignition 159 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Turn the key from the 1 off position to 8 on 4 Cycle eight times rapidly within 10 seconds between the 1 off position and 3 on Note The eighth turn must end in the 3 on position 5 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been activated 6 Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter Note If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again 7 The doors will lock then un
385. ter replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 250 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be ch
386. th RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The sliding car R indicator light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction Control TCS Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control Engine Traction Control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake Traction Control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction Control is most active at low speeds During Traction Control events the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will flash If the Traction Contr
387. that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close
388. the Driver controls chapter The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system 206 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints In case there is a problem with the e J front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or
389. the first coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but not more than 10 seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the key was not successfully programmed it will not start your vehicle s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key s programmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait twenty seconds and then repeat this p
390. the garage Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security reasons Refer to Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons later in this section Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Car2U system Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist you in programming the transmitter Additional Car2U system information can be found on line at www learcar2U com or by calling the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 572 2728 Types of garage door openers rolling code and fixed code The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate rolling code and fixed code garage door openers e Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used 140 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e Fixed code garage door openers were produced pr
391. the maximum GCWR in the chart This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow It must be below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart 262 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow option package Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension For your safety and to maximize vehicle performance be sure to use the proper equipment while towing Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure e Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1600 km e Stay within your vehicle s load limits Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter e Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing Refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to the severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance information Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance Certification label For load specification terms found on the label refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter when figuring the total weight of your vehicle Your vehicl
392. the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S
393. the outside of the vehicle and push down until the head restraint locks into place Lift gently to ensure it is locked into place WARNING If the head restraint has been removed from a seating position to accommodate a high back child restraint the head restraint must be re installed prior to use of the seat by any other occupant in order to reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle 219 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling e Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locki
394. the rear speakers are muted and press again for Single Play same media playing through all speakers You can also press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function For further interaction information refer to Single Play Dual play under Operation later in this section 12 MEDIA Press repeatedly to select from the various possible wom playing media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD DVD AUX The media will show in the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode When in Single Play mode the media source will be displayed on the radio Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and DVD AUX sources Note If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system this function is only active in dual play mode 13 RETURN Press to return to the ren playing media or to resume playback 14 MENU When playing a DVD ew press MENU once to enter the DVD disc menu if available and press twice to enter the system set up menu From the set up menu you may select from Angle Aspect Ratio Language Subtitles Disc resume Compression Restore Defaults and Back For more detailed information refer to Menu mode 15 ENTER Press to select confirm the current selection 16 Cursor Brightness controls Use the cursor controls to make Q various
395. ting Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section 137 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System Console mount DUO A M Visor mount To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 138 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Erasing HomeLink buttons Console mount Ue m4 Visor mount To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot be erased e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds
396. tions are marked with the child seat symbol e Second row bench seats applicable to five and seven passenger vehicles e Second row bucket seats applicable to six passenger vehicles WARNING Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death 223 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The LATCH anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear section of the second row seat between the cushion and seatback l l The LATCH anchors are below the locator symbols on the seat back on 6 and 7 passenger vehicles The 5 passenger vehicle does not require the symbol however the anchor itself is located in the same area Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown Plastic LATCH guides can be obtained from an authorized dealer They snap onto the LATCH lower anchors in the seat to help attach a child seat with rigid attachments The guides hold the seat tri
397. tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in Light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the re
398. tivate Ut REAR SEATS To have an unobstructed rear view you can fold down the second and third row head restraints Refer to the Folding down the 2nd row 60 40 seats and bucket seats and 3rd row folding seat if equipped sections later in this chapter If needed when installing some high back child restraints the head restraints of the second row seating positions can be removed Insert a thin pointed object such as a paper clip or pushpin into the hole of each head restraint guide and while lifting up remove the head restraint Store the head restraint in a secure location in the vehicle such as on the floor against the rear of the front seats To re install the head restraint line the posts up in the holes on the seat back with the head restraint strap facing the outside of the vehicle and push down until the head restraint locks into place Lift gently to ensure it is locked into place 175 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Refer to Safety seats for children later in this chapter WARNING If the head restraint has been removed from a seating position to accommodate a high back child restraint the head restraint must be re installed prior to use of the seat by any other occupant in order to reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision Folding down the 2nd row 60 40 seats and bucket seats Ensure that th
399. to the wiper arm align the cross pin and keyway denoted with the arrows ee CS and firmly press the wiper blade into the wiper arm until an audible snap is heard ENGINE OIL S27 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick e 4 0L V6 engine oXXXXXXXXXXI 354 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 4 6L V8 engine NXX XKX KKK KK KKN 7 lt ORK gt 3 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL e If the oil level is below the lower hole add enough oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes e 4 0L V6 engine 355 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 4 6L V8 engine e Oil levels above the upper hole may cause engine damage Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized de
400. trol of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN 278 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon yi will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled push the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction Control TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel s
401. trol system 377 ENGINE seeseteccaveiseiecenameneneaye 390 CLE AMINE kapingen eoret 342 COOLAMNE oreraa eren 361 fail safe cooling serura 366 399 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Index idle speed control 000 359 filter specifications 367 384 lubrication specifications 385 fuel pump shut off switch 307 refill capacities 0 0 0 385 improving fuel economy 374 Service Points oe 350 351 octane rating 0 371 390 starting after a collision 307 quality sirier inai 372 Engine block heater 274 running out of fuel 325 372 i safety information relating to ee ee ea a automotive fuels s s s 367 checking and adding GIP StICK ccc eccttesssssssssssseeesen 354 FUSES sssr 308 309 filter specifications 357 384 recommendations 006 357 G refill capacities c eee 385 Specifications cccceeees 385 Garage door opener 120 133 Event data recording 0 7 Gas cap see Fuel cap 370 Exhaust fumes 2 273 Gas mileage ate nee 2 see Fuel economy s 374 F GUISES renoier 18 Fail safe Cooling ceeeeees 366 S Axle Weight Family entertainment system 66 CalCulating sc is ci issicciseessndadanssi 262 Fluid capacities eee 385 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Fog lamps ou ccceeeseceseeesseeees 08 Amps i ou Calculating so cseve
402. ty Canopy system Refer to Safety Canopy system later in this chapter 202 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e one or more impact and safing sensors e a readiness light and tone e diagnostic module e and the electrical wiring which connects the components e Front passenger sensing system Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sensing system will disable wil
403. ucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating a
404. uch as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc On the left side of the system is the Headphone A input jack This G 2 3 4 headphone will listen to the media selected on the Channel A source When you need to make any vV jl R AJA adjustments to the media volume etc ensure that the Channel A source is highlighted Also located here are the various auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR camcorder video games etc The specific jacks are as follows 1 Yellow video input 2 White left channel audio input 3 Red right channel audio input 4 Black wired headphone jack not included The B headphone jack 5 is located on the right side of the DVD system 5 Plug in wired headphones not included here 8 O Note The B headphones can only access DVD and AUX modes They cannot access radio sources 92 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Audio displays Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system Status messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status Some possible radio display messages e SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY e DVD LOAD e DVD MENU e DVD STOP Audio interaction You can then also use the front audio controls to advance reverse play and pause a DVD While a DVD is playing you may use the following controls on the front radio e SEEK Press to
405. udio input e Red 3 right channel audio input 4 Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX 5 Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to DVD AUX If your source is properly plugged in it will appear on the LCD Liquid Crystal Display screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black If the video source is set to DVD AUX the display will automatically turn on if a video signal is detected To listen to audio over the headphones Dual play mode Navigation based radio systems only You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headphones Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired headphones for further information e Black 4 wired headphone output wired headphones not included There are two ways to get into dual play mode Lan 1 After initially switching ignition on when a is disc inserted the FES immediately switches to dual play mode 2 Press the headphone speaker A t button on the DVD player or navigation radio touch screen 3 Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time Repeating each of these actions will switch back to single play mode all speakers playing and headphones off A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate whi
406. ue 324 Jump starting 325 Wrecker towing 331 2 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Customer Assistance 333 Reporting safety defects U S only 339 Reporting safety defects Canada only 339 Cleaning 340 Maintenance and Specifications 348 Engine compartment 350 Engine oil 354 Battery 359 Engine coolant 361 Fuel information 367 Air filter s 382 Part numbers 384 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 385 Engine data 390 Accessories 393 Ford Extended Service Plan 395 Index 398 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2009 Ford Motor Company 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Austr
407. unning board surface as the area may become slippery Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 340 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a
408. urn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position 369 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Easy Fuel no cap fuel system Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel no cap fuel filler system This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system The Easy Fuel system is self sealing and protected against dust dirt water and snow ice When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system Pump fuel as normal 4 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel fille
409. uroyne ue Ul ping esesn enp e Jo as uelTUYpe poylenb e Aq peyoeyo oq pmoy s Jade pmyy pue pmMypf uotsstutsuel JO yuNOwe oJ Jafooo yuel ul ue yy peddinbea jt pue 9zIs J J009 UO peseq Area Leur suoTeoydde ourog Ayoedeo Y Arp oyewrxoidde ATUO soyeorpul C19 P V OS60ZIN SSM 10 TO P V 6Z60ZIN SSM UONPoyloods pIo JO sjUoUToIMDaL oy JOW pue JIL ULIYO Q IdV 9 eaey ATUO p u Ilo uSuy Ioyepueu 40u ST IO 1070u1 pu jq IN YU S IO IY PU S JO SNz QpoTyea MOA ul poddinbs AT eulsi1o d JuRTOOD y PPV UOT BITFIIedS quoleamMbo 389 Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing 2010 Explorer exp USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA E nnd Ua engine 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 EDIS Coil on Plug Sunk plug gap 0 052 0 056 inch 0 039 0 043 inch Gs 32 1 42 mm 1 0 1 l1mm Compression ratio 971 981 8 1 Engine drivebelt routing e 4 0L V6 Engine e 4 6L V8 Engine 390 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO n DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG that i Safety Comp lance FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG WTH XXXXKG vehicle and prescribe where the a C ay Ze Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX
410. ust be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada To the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel inform
411. utolock feature will lock all the doors liftgate and liftgate window when e all doors are closed e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h 150 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Deactivating activating autolock Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled There are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e Performing the power door lock control procedure or e Performing the keyless entry keypad if equipped procedure or e Performing the message center if equipped procedure Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Before following the activation or deactivation procedures make sure that the anti theft system is not armed ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate window are closed Power door unlock lock procedure You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait 30 seconds Note All doors
412. utton to return the seatback to its original position The power fold down seats will operate for 30 minutes after the ignition switch is in the 1 off position The transmission must be in P Park and the liftgate or liftgate glass must be open Similar to the battery saver feature the power 3rd row seat will be disabled 30 minutes after turning the vehicle off If the power 3rd row seat is disabled after 30 minutes the seat can be enabled by opening any door pressing the unlock control on the remote entry transmitter pressing any keyless keypad button if equipped or turning the ignition key 183 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
413. ve seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the mal control on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned to the on position Unlocking and locking the doors liftgate and liftgate window using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or one of the vehicle s personal codes Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate To unlock all doors and liftgate press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To open the liftgate window press the 5 e 6 control within five seconds To lock all doors liftgate and liftgate window press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time Note The driver s door must be closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
414. vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition
415. viously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 65 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required Song title information not available Category information not available NO TEXT NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Song title information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Category information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly You are in a location that is blocking the SIRIUS signal i e tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474
416. void spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission transfer case or front axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly 301 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Driving Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you w
417. wertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal e Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter 372 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refilling with a portable fuel container With the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the included funnel 1
418. when a AO CD MP3 is playing to pause the disc CD PAUSE will appear in the display Press again to resume play 4 For a single CD system press amp to eject the current disc ay The display will read CD EJECT O For an in dash six CD system press 4 and then select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc To auto eject up to six discs press and hold 4 until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 42 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AM FM Single CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped OE Gr L RS UZ cD FM ae t ee Asec Z semo REW FF lt 4FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE P gt Il OK l 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 g T S 6 o WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory
419. when the engine is operating at normal speeds contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the braking system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the reverse sensing system park aid is disabled LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 28 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitori
420. will automatically determine the fan speed the direction of the airflow outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature 13 Manual override controls or lele Allows you to manually determine where airflow is directed To return to fully automatic control press AUTO 14 Driver s side temperature control Controls the temperature of the vehicle cabin When DUAL zone is pressed controls the driver s side temperature 102 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 15 Fan Speed Manually increases or decreases the fan speed 16 EXT Displays the outside air ry temperature It will remain displayed until the EXT control is pressed again The external temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle has been moving for a period of time 17 Temperature conversion ry Press to toggle between Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature on the DATC display only The set point temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half degree increments Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in OFF or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from th
421. wn2002 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death Using your vehicle with a snowplow
422. y and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury 367 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle Always turn off the vehicle before refueling Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper med
423. y under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale af
424. you first start your vehicle For instructions on selecting the AWD LOCKED mode refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement This mode is appropriate for severe winter or off road conditions such as deep snow ice or shallow sand The use of AWD LOCKED on dry or hard surfaces may produce some noise such as occasional clunks but will not damage the drive system Autolock operation 4 6L engine vehicles only If the AWD system begins to overheat the system will place itself in the Autolock mode e AWD LOCKED will be displayed in the message center for four seconds and the 4x4 indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster A warning chime will also sound This condition may clear without any action being taken by the driver once the AWD system has reached a safe operating temperature e The 4X4 indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off when the AWD system reaches a safe operating temperature and normal AWD operation is restored Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles AWD and 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the road How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rou
425. ys make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 214 2010 Explorer exp Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children 5 Recommended pooo Child size height weight or age restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less Use a child safety toddlers generally age four or younger seat sometimes called

Ford 2010 Explorer Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents